1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \default_output_format pdf2
74 \bibtex_command bibtex
75 \index_command default
79 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
80 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
84 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
85 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
86 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
91 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
92 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
95 \use_package amsmath 1
96 \use_package amssymb 1
99 \use_package mathdots 1
100 \use_package mathtools 0
101 \use_package mhchem 1
102 \use_package stackrel 0
103 \use_package stmaryrd 0
104 \use_package undertilde 0
106 \cite_engine_type default
110 \paperorientation portrait
114 \notefontcolor #0000ff
131 \paragraph_separation skip
133 \quotes_language english
136 \paperpagestyle default
137 \tracking_changes false
138 \output_changes false
152 by the \SpecialChar LyX
157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
159 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
160 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
161 Documentation mailing list:
162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
164 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
175 \begin_inset Newline newline
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Note Note
186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
187 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
194 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
202 \begin_layout Standard
203 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
204 LatexCommand tableofcontents
211 \begin_layout Chapter
215 \begin_layout Section
216 What is \SpecialChar LyX
220 \begin_layout Standard
222 is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
266 \begin_layout Standard
267 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
272 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
276 \begin_layout Standard
281 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
282 's philosophy: most importantly,
283 the format of all of the manuals.
284 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
285 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
291 manual describes that, too.
294 \begin_layout Section
299 \begin_layout Standard
300 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
301 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
303 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
304 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
310 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
311 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
313 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
314 only a vertical scrollbar.
315 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
316 The first case is large images.
317 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
318 image and use the option
329 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
332 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
333 this doesn't work for equations yet.
336 \begin_layout Standard
337 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
338 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
346 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
353 \begin_layout Section
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
360 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
362 Just select the manual you want to read from the
369 \begin_layout Section
370 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
374 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
381 \begin_layout Standard
382 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
383 can be configured via the menu
385 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
389 \begin_inset Index idx
392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
399 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
401 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
402 packages are available.
403 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
405 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
407 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
412 \begin_inset space \space{}
415 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
416 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
418 To force \SpecialChar LyX
419 to re-inspect your system, you should use
421 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
425 \begin_inset Index idx
428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
429 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
435 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
436 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
439 \begin_layout Section
442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
444 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
451 \begin_layout Standard
452 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
453 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
454 installed, but you will not be
455 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
456 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
457 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
458 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
459 document can always be output as plain text
463 \begin_layout Standard
464 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
465 or DocBook classes or packages.
466 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
467 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
473 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
476 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
484 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
485 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
488 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 \begin_inset Note Note
495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
496 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
497 Code box prevent that the term
498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
506 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
507 More about \SpecialChar TeX
508 Code is described in section
513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
515 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
519 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
520 is explained in section
525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
527 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
537 \begin_inset Index idx
540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
541 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
547 See section 5.1 of the
551 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
555 \begin_layout Chapter
556 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
560 \begin_layout Section
561 Basic File Operations
562 \begin_inset Index idx
565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
574 \begin_layout Standard
579 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
580 in addition to some more advanced operations:
583 \begin_layout Itemize
605 \begin_layout Itemize
621 arg "buffer-new-template"
627 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
659 \begin_layout Itemize
673 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
707 arg "buffer-write-as"
713 \begin_layout Itemize
727 \begin_layout Itemize
741 \begin_layout Standard
742 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
743 a few minor differences.
746 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
757 command lists the available templates.
758 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
759 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
760 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
768 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
775 \begin_layout Standard
776 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
808 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
809 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
810 is just that — a big, blank space.
818 \begin_layout Standard
839 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
844 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
847 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
865 will reload the document from disk.
866 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
867 and want to restore it to the last save.
876 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
877 them as your changes.
880 \begin_layout Section
881 Basic Editing Features
882 \begin_inset Index idx
885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
892 \begin_inset CommandInset label
894 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
901 \begin_layout Standard
902 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
903 can perform cut and paste operations
904 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
905 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
906 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
907 editing features and how to access
909 We will start with cut and paste.
912 \begin_layout Standard
913 As you might expect, the
917 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
918 various other editing features.
919 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
923 \begin_layout Itemize
929 \begin_inset Index idx
932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
961 \begin_layout Itemize
967 \begin_inset Index idx
970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
999 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset Index idx
1008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1033 \begin_layout Itemize
1037 \begin_inset space ~
1043 \begin_layout Itemize
1047 \begin_inset space ~
1053 \begin_layout Itemize
1057 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset space ~
1067 \begin_inset Index idx
1070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1079 \begin_inset Index idx
1082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1097 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1107 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1113 \begin_layout Standard
1114 The first three are self-explanatory.
1115 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1116 and other programs by
1137 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1138 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1143 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1144 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1145 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1146 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1147 into individual cells.
1151 \begin_inset space ~
1156 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1157 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1161 \begin_layout Standard
1165 \begin_inset space ~
1170 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1172 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1187 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1188 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1189 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1195 \begin_inset space \space{}
1198 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1199 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1202 \begin_inset space ~
1205 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1215 \begin_inset space ~
1224 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1225 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1227 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1231 \begin_inset space ~
1236 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1237 start a new paragraph.
1238 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1239 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1247 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1261 \begin_inset space ~
1264 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1267 paste from the primary selection.
1268 This is normally the currently selected text.
1271 \begin_layout Standard
1274 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1276 \begin_inset space ~
1280 \begin_inset space ~
1288 \begin_inset space ~
1292 \begin_inset space ~
1298 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1304 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1307 \begin_inset space ~
1316 \begin_inset space ~
1321 button to skip the current word.
1325 \begin_inset space ~
1330 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1334 \begin_inset space ~
1339 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1341 If the toggle is set, searching for
1342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1353 will not match the word
1354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1368 Match whole words only
1370 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1371 to only find complete words, e.
1372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1401 offers also an advanced
1404 \begin_inset space ~
1408 \begin_inset space ~
1413 feature that is described in sec.
1414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1420 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1427 \begin_layout Standard
1428 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1429 \begin_inset space \space{}
1433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1441 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1443 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1448 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1455 \begin_layout Standard
1459 arg "inset-select-all"
1462 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1463 When the cursor is inside an inset
1466 arg "inset-select-all"
1469 selects the content of the inset.
1473 arg "inset-select-all"
1476 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1481 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1484 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1488 \begin_layout Section
1490 \begin_inset Index idx
1493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1500 \begin_inset Index idx
1503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1512 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1519 \begin_layout Standard
1520 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1522 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1525 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1528 or the toolbar button
1534 to undo some mistake.
1535 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1537 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1540 or the toolbar button
1547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1554 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1558 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1561 \begin_layout Standard
1562 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1571 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1572 This is a consequence of the 100
1573 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1576 step undo limit mentioned above.
1579 \begin_layout Standard
1588 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1590 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1594 \begin_layout Section
1596 \begin_inset Index idx
1599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1608 \begin_layout Standard
1609 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1612 \begin_layout Enumerate
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1622 once anywhere in the edit window.
1623 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1627 \begin_layout Enumerate
1632 \begin_layout Itemize
1639 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1642 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1645 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1646 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1649 \begin_layout Itemize
1650 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1653 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1660 \begin_layout Enumerate
1661 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1665 \begin_layout Standard
1666 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1667 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1671 \begin_layout Section
1673 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1675 name "sec:Navigating"
1680 \begin_inset Index idx
1683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1692 \begin_layout Standard
1694 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1697 \begin_layout Itemize
1702 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1703 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1706 \begin_layout Itemize
1707 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1709 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1711 \begin_inset space ~
1716 or by the toolbar button
1719 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1725 \begin_layout Itemize
1726 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1728 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1731 and use the same menu to return to them.
1732 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1735 \begin_layout Standard
1739 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1744 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1745 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1747 \begin_inset space ~
1752 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1753 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1754 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1755 your last editing position.
1758 \begin_layout Standard
1763 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1767 \begin_layout Subsection
1769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1771 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1778 \begin_layout Standard
1779 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1780 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1781 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1789 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1793 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1800 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1805 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1809 \begin_layout Standard
1810 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1811 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1812 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1813 dialog and to modify the citation.
1816 \begin_layout Standard
1817 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1819 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1820 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1828 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1831 \begin_layout Standard
1832 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1833 you further to control the display.
1838 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1839 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1845 option keeps it in the current view state.
1846 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1847 \begin_inset space ~
1850 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1851 \begin_inset space ~
1854 3, the subsections of sections
1855 \begin_inset space ~
1858 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1863 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1864 \begin_inset space ~
1868 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1878 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1881 \begin_layout Standard
1888 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1889 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1903 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1904 So, for example, you can move section
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1909 \begin_inset space ~
1912 2.4 or after section
1913 \begin_inset space ~
1918 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1931 (or the corresponding key bindings
1939 ) you can change the level of sections.
1940 So you can for example make section
1941 \begin_inset space ~
1945 \begin_inset space ~
1949 \begin_inset space ~
1955 \begin_layout Section
1956 Input/Word Completion
1957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1959 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1964 \begin_inset Index idx
1967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1974 \begin_inset Index idx
1977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2008 \begin_layout Standard
2010 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2012 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2013 is used to propose completions.
2016 \begin_layout Standard
2017 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2020 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2025 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2032 \begin_inset space ~
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2041 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2045 \begin_inset space ~
2050 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2051 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2055 \begin_inset space ~
2061 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2062 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2063 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2064 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2067 \begin_layout Standard
2069 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2070 completions available.
2075 key to accept a proposed completion.
2076 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2077 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2078 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2085 \begin_layout Standard
2086 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2087 ing options for text.
2088 The special math option
2092 enables characters to be composed.
2093 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2094 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2097 , you can then input the characters
2098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2109 to a formula to get it.
2110 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2111 of the math toolbar.
2112 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2116 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2117 's installation folder.
2118 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2127 \begin_layout Section
2129 \begin_inset Index idx
2132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2139 \begin_inset Index idx
2142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2171 \begin_inset Index idx
2174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2205 \begin_layout Standard
2206 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2220 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2223 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2227 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2234 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2241 \begin_layout Standard
2245 \begin_inset space ~
2253 \begin_inset space ~
2274 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2278 \begin_layout Labeling
2279 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2283 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2284 LatexCommand nomenclature
2286 description "Tabulator key"
2292 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2294 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2295 \begin_inset space ~
2299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2301 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2308 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2312 , especially section
2313 \begin_inset space ~
2317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2319 reference "subsec:Lists"
2325 If you are still confused, look in the
2330 \begin_inset Newline newline
2338 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2339 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2343 \begin_layout Labeling
2344 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2348 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2349 LatexCommand nomenclature
2351 description "Escape key"
2358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2365 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2366 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2369 \begin_layout Labeling
2370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2376 \begin_inset space ~
2380 \begin_inset space ~
2387 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2388 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2392 \begin_layout Standard
2393 There are three modifier keys:
2396 \begin_layout Labeling
2397 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2415 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2416 LatexCommand nomenclature
2418 description "Control key"
2422 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2423 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2427 \begin_layout Itemize
2436 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2439 \begin_layout Itemize
2448 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2451 \begin_layout Itemize
2460 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2464 \begin_layout Labeling
2465 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2483 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2484 LatexCommand nomenclature
2486 description "Shift key"
2490 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2491 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2494 \begin_layout Labeling
2495 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2513 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2514 LatexCommand nomenclature
2516 description "Alt or Meta key"
2520 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2521 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2522 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2528 \begin_inset Newline newline
2531 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2533 menu accelerator keys
2536 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2537 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2541 \begin_layout Standard
2542 For example, the sequence
2543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2549 \begin_inset space ~
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2559 \begin_inset space ~
2567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2586 \begin_inset space ~
2592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2602 \begin_layout Standard
2607 manual lists all other things bound to the
2615 \begin_layout Standard
2616 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2618 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2619 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2620 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2621 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2622 The \SpecialChar LyX
2623 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2624 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2625 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2627 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2643 followed by a capital
2650 \begin_layout Chapter
2653 \begin_inset Index idx
2656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2666 \begin_layout Section
2668 \begin_inset Index idx
2671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2680 \begin_layout Subsection
2684 \begin_layout Standard
2685 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2686 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2687 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2688 numbering schemes, and so on.
2689 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2690 and format the title of your document differently.
2693 \begin_layout Standard
2698 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2699 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2700 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2701 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2702 picks one for you by default.
2703 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2706 \begin_layout Subsection
2708 \begin_inset Index idx
2711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2718 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2720 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2727 \begin_layout Standard
2728 You can select a class using the
2730 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2731 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2735 \begin_inset Index idx
2738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2745 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2749 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2753 \begin_layout Standard
2754 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2759 \begin_layout Description
2760 Article for basic articles
2763 \begin_layout Description
2764 Report for basic reports
2767 \begin_layout Description
2768 Book for writing a book
2771 \begin_layout Description
2772 Letter for US-style letters
2775 \begin_layout Standard
2776 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2777 only uses if you have installed
2778 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2779 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2780 distributions will include
2782 Here are some of the classes.
2783 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2785 Special Document Classes
2794 \begin_layout Description
2795 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2798 \begin_layout Description
2799 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2803 \begin_layout Description
2804 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2808 \begin_layout Description
2809 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2810 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2811 There are three article layouts available.
2812 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2813 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2814 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2815 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2820 sequential numbering
2821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2824 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2825 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2826 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2827 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2830 \begin_layout Description
2831 Beamer Layout for presentations
2834 \begin_layout Description
2835 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2836 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2837 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2838 with \SpecialChar LyX
2842 \begin_layout Description
2843 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2846 \begin_layout Description
2848 \begin_inset space ~
2851 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2854 \begin_layout Description
2855 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2858 \begin_layout Description
2859 Foils Used to make transparencies
2862 \begin_layout Description
2863 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2864 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2865 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2866 with \SpecialChar LyX
2870 \begin_layout Description
2871 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2872 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2875 \begin_layout Description
2876 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2879 \begin_layout Description
2880 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2883 \begin_layout Description
2884 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2885 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2886 (Is used by this document.)
2889 \begin_layout Description
2890 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2893 \begin_layout Description
2894 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2897 \begin_layout Description
2902 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2903 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2905 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2909 \begin_layout Description
2910 Slides Used to make transparencies
2913 \begin_layout Description
2915 \begin_inset space ~
2918 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2919 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2922 \begin_layout Description
2923 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2926 \begin_layout Standard
2927 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2929 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2935 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2936 of the document classes.
2939 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2943 \begin_layout Standard
2944 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2946 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2947 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2949 \begin_inset Index idx
2952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2969 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2970 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2972 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2975 \begin_layout Standard
2978 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2983 , are highly specialized.
2985 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
2986 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
2987 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
2988 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2989 by some document class.
2990 There are just too many of them.
2991 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2994 \begin_layout Standard
2995 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3003 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3004 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3005 document class for a new file.
3007 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3012 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3021 manual for information on how to install them.
3022 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3028 \begin_layout Standard
3029 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3030 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3031 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3032 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3033 class files to be used for dissertation
3034 s submitted to those universities.
3035 The \SpecialChar LyX
3036 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3038 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3042 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3048 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3051 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3055 name "subsec:Modules"
3060 \begin_inset Index idx
3063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3074 chosen document class.
3075 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3076 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3083 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3087 \begin_inset Index idx
3090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3097 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3101 \begin_layout Standard
3102 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3103 packages or file format converters that are not always
3104 installed by default.
3106 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3107 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3108 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3109 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3111 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3112 file without the missing prerequisites.
3113 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3114 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3117 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3121 \begin_inset Index idx
3124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3125 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3135 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3144 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3147 \begin_layout Standard
3148 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3156 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3158 will advise you about these things.
3166 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3170 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3175 \begin_inset Index idx
3178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3179 Document ! Local Layout
3187 \begin_layout Standard
3188 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3189 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3190 : They are intended to be used in
3191 a variety of different documents.
3192 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3193 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3194 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3195 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3196 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3198 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3216 manual for information on how to use it.
3219 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3223 \begin_layout Standard
3224 Each class has a default set of options.
3225 Here's a quick table describing them:
3228 \begin_layout Standard
3229 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3235 \begin_layout Standard
3237 \begin_inset Tabular
3238 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3239 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3240 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3241 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3242 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3243 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3244 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3698 \begin_layout Standard
3699 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3705 \begin_layout Standard
3706 You're probably also wondering what
3707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3711 \begin_inset space ~
3715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3719 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3720 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3725 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3730 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3740 headings, there are also
3748 headings, and so on.
3749 We will describe these headings fully in section
3750 \begin_inset space ~
3754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3756 reference "subsec:Headings"
3763 \begin_layout Subsection
3765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3767 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3772 \begin_inset Index idx
3775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3782 \begin_inset Index idx
3785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3794 \begin_layout Standard
3795 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3797 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3804 \begin_inset space ~
3812 \begin_inset space ~
3817 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3819 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3820 doesn't support special options you want to
3821 use for your document.
3822 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3823 -class and its options, you have to read
3827 \begin_layout Standard
3831 \begin_inset space ~
3838 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3844 \begin_inset space ~
3849 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3850 You can choose between the following five options:
3853 \begin_layout Labeling
3854 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3859 Use default page style of current class.
3862 \begin_layout Labeling
3863 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3868 No page numbers or headings.
3871 \begin_layout Labeling
3872 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3880 \begin_layout Labeling
3881 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3886 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3887 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3888 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3889 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3892 \begin_layout Labeling
3893 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3898 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3899 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3905 \begin_inset Index idx
3908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3910 -packages ! fancyhdr
3916 How they are defined is explained in section
3917 \begin_inset space ~
3921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3923 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3930 \begin_layout Standard
3931 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3932 \begin_inset space ~
3936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3938 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3945 \begin_layout Subsection
3946 Paper Size and Orientation
3947 \begin_inset Index idx
3950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3951 Document ! Paper size
3957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3959 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3966 \begin_layout Standard
3967 You can find the following options in the menu
3970 \begin_inset space ~
3977 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3981 \begin_inset Index idx
3984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3993 \begin_layout Labeling
3994 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3998 \begin_inset space ~
4003 What size paper to print on.
4008 \begin_layout Itemize
4014 \begin_layout Itemize
4020 \begin_layout Itemize
4026 \begin_layout Itemize
4032 \begin_layout Itemize
4035 US letter, US legal, US executive
4038 \begin_layout Itemize
4044 \begin_layout Itemize
4051 \begin_layout Labeling
4052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4057 To choose whether to output as
4068 \begin_layout Labeling
4069 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4073 \begin_inset space ~
4078 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4079 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4082 \begin_layout Subsection
4084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4086 name "subsec:Margins"
4091 \begin_inset Index idx
4094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4101 \begin_inset Index idx
4104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4113 \begin_layout Standard
4114 Paper margins are set in the menu
4116 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4120 \begin_inset Index idx
4123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4132 \begin_layout Standard
4133 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4134 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4135 the paper format and the font size into account.
4138 \begin_layout Subsection
4142 \begin_layout Standard
4143 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4149 That includes the paragraph environments.
4150 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4151 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4152 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4154 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4163 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4165 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4166 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4167 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4170 \begin_layout Section
4171 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4172 \begin_inset Index idx
4175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4176 Paragraph ! Indentation
4184 \begin_layout Subsection
4186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4188 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4195 \begin_layout Standard
4196 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4197 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4200 \begin_layout Standard
4201 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4202 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4203 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4204 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4208 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4214 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4215 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4216 language than English.
4218 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4221 \begin_layout Standard
4222 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4223 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4224 into \SpecialChar LyX
4226 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4229 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4231 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4232 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4233 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4240 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4241 goes to produce a printable file.
4246 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4248 gives you the ability globally to change
4252 these pre-coded spacings.
4253 We will explain more later.
4256 \begin_layout Subsection
4257 Paragraph Separation
4258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4260 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4265 \begin_inset Index idx
4268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4269 Paragraph ! Separation
4277 \begin_layout Standard
4285 \begin_inset space ~
4293 \begin_inset space ~
4300 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4304 \begin_inset Index idx
4307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4313 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4316 \begin_layout Subsection
4320 \begin_layout Standard
4321 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4324 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4326 \begin_inset space ~
4331 dialog and toggle the
4334 \begin_inset space ~
4339 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4342 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4346 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4347 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4351 \begin_layout Standard
4352 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4353 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4356 \begin_layout Subsection
4358 \begin_inset Index idx
4361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4362 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4370 \begin_layout Standard
4373 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4377 \begin_inset Index idx
4380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4389 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4393 \begin_inset space ~
4402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4403 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4409 \begin_inset Index idx
4412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4414 -packages ! setspace
4419 installed to use this feature.
4424 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4426 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4428 \begin_inset space ~
4433 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4434 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4437 \begin_layout Section
4438 Paragraph Environments
4439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4441 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4446 \begin_inset Index idx
4449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4450 Paragraph ! Environments
4456 \begin_inset Index idx
4459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4460 Paragraph environments|(
4468 \begin_layout Subsection
4472 \begin_layout Standard
4473 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4476 \begin_layout Standard
4495 \begin_inset Newline newline
4498 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4500 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4501 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4502 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4511 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4514 \begin_layout Standard
4515 A paragraph environment is simply a
4516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4523 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4524 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4525 scheme, labels, and so on.
4526 Additionally, you can
4527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4534 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4535 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4536 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4537 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4539 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4541 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4544 \begin_layout Standard
4545 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4546 \begin_inset Graphics
4547 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4553 at the left end of the toolbar.
4555 will change the environment of the
4559 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4560 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4561 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4565 \begin_layout Standard
4574 create a new paragraph using the
4578 paragraph environment.
4580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4587 because if you are in one of these environments:
4590 \begin_layout Itemize
4596 \begin_layout Itemize
4602 \begin_layout Itemize
4608 \begin_layout Itemize
4614 \begin_layout Itemize
4620 \begin_layout Itemize
4626 \begin_layout Itemize
4632 \begin_layout Standard
4634 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4638 , rather than resetting it to
4643 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4644 \begin_inset space ~
4648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4650 reference "sec:Nesting"
4657 \begin_layout Subsection
4661 \begin_layout Standard
4662 The default paragraph environment is
4667 It creates a plain paragraph.
4669 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4670 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4671 this manual) are in the
4678 \begin_layout Standard
4679 You can nest a paragraph using the
4683 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4691 \begin_layout Subsection
4693 \begin_inset Index idx
4696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4705 \begin_layout Standard
4706 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4707 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4716 for thanks or contact information.
4717 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4718 places all of this on a separate page
4719 along with today's date.
4720 For other types of documents, the title
4721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4728 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4732 \begin_layout Standard
4734 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4748 Here's how you use them:
4751 \begin_layout Itemize
4752 Put the title of your document in the
4759 \begin_layout Itemize
4760 Put the author name in the
4767 \begin_layout Itemize
4768 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4769 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4775 Note that using this environment is optional.
4776 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4777 will automatically insert today's date.
4778 If you don't want a date, use the option
4780 Suppress default date on front page
4784 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4785 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4787 \begin_inset space ~
4795 \begin_layout Standard
4796 You can use footnotes to insert
4797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4804 or contact information.
4807 \begin_layout Subsection
4809 \begin_inset Index idx
4812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4821 name "subsec:Headings"
4828 \begin_layout Standard
4829 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4831 takes care of the numbering for you.
4834 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4836 \begin_inset Index idx
4839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4840 Section headings ! Numbered
4848 \begin_layout Standard
4849 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4853 \begin_layout Enumerate
4859 \begin_layout Enumerate
4865 \begin_layout Enumerate
4871 \begin_layout Enumerate
4877 \begin_layout Enumerate
4883 \begin_layout Enumerate
4889 \begin_layout Enumerate
4895 \begin_layout Standard
4897 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4898 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4899 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4902 \begin_layout Standard
4903 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4904 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4905 You group the book into chapters.
4907 does a similar grouping:
4910 \begin_layout Itemize
4915 is divided into either
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4938 \begin_layout Itemize
4950 \begin_layout Itemize
4962 \begin_layout Itemize
4974 \begin_layout Itemize
4986 \begin_layout Standard
4987 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4995 Not all document types use the
4999 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5004 is the top-level heading.
5012 \begin_layout Standard
5017 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5018 labels it with its number,
5019 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5021 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5035 \begin_inset Index idx
5038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5039 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5048 The unnumbered section headings have a
5049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5056 at the end of their name.
5057 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5058 the table of contents, see section
5059 \begin_inset space ~
5063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5072 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5073 Changing the Numbering
5074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5076 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5083 \begin_layout Standard
5084 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5085 in the Table of Contents.
5086 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5088 Just as certain classes start with
5102 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5112 This is something you can change.
5115 \begin_layout Standard
5118 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5122 \begin_inset Index idx
5125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5134 \begin_inset space ~
5138 \begin_inset space ~
5143 you will see two counters.
5148 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5149 numbers a section heading.
5150 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5154 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5155 Short Titles of Headings
5156 \begin_inset Index idx
5159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5160 Section headings ! Short titles
5166 \begin_inset Argument 1
5169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5178 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5185 \begin_layout Standard
5186 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5187 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5188 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5189 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5192 \begin_layout Standard
5194 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5195 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5196 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5197 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5200 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5202 \begin_inset space ~
5208 This will insert a box labeled
5209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5213 \begin_inset space ~
5217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5220 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5221 This also works for captions inside floats.
5222 There can only be one short title per title.
5225 \begin_layout Standard
5226 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5229 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5233 \begin_layout Standard
5234 The following information applies to all section headings:
5237 \begin_layout Itemize
5238 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5241 \begin_layout Itemize
5242 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5245 \begin_layout Itemize
5246 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5249 \begin_layout Itemize
5250 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5253 \begin_layout Subsection
5257 \begin_layout Standard
5259 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5273 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5274 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5275 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5276 the text they contain.
5277 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5285 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5288 \begin_layout Standard
5289 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5298 when you start a new paragraph.
5299 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5303 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5304 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5305 have to change back to the
5309 environment yourself.
5312 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5321 \begin_inset Index idx
5324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5333 \begin_layout Standard
5334 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5335 time for the differences.
5344 are identical except for one difference:
5348 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5357 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5361 Here's an example of the
5374 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5376 See – no indentation!
5380 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5381 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5382 the other paragraph.
5385 \begin_layout Standard
5386 Here's another example, this time in the
5393 \begin_layout Quotation
5399 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5400 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5401 the first line, then
5405 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5409 you were quoting other text.
5412 \begin_layout Quotation
5413 Here's a new paragraph.
5414 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5415 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5418 \begin_layout Standard
5419 As the examples show,
5423 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5424 They should put quotes in the
5429 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5433 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5436 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5438 \begin_inset Index idx
5441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5448 \begin_inset Index idx
5451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5467 \begin_layout Standard
5472 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5478 \begin_inset Newline newline
5481 Which I did not rehearse!
5485 It could be much worse.
5486 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5488 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5489 indented a bit more than the first.
5490 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5496 \begin_inset Newline newline
5499 And make things look fine
5500 \begin_inset Newline newline
5506 arg "newline-insert newline"
5512 \begin_layout Standard
5517 does not indent both margins.
5518 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5519 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5522 arg "newline-insert newline"
5528 \begin_layout Subsection
5530 \begin_inset Index idx
5533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5549 \begin_layout Standard
5551 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5561 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5562 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5571 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5572 lets you provide your own label.
5573 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5574 describing some general features of all four of them.
5577 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5581 \begin_layout Standard
5582 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5584 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5585 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5594 reset the environment to
5598 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5599 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5600 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5604 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5608 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5615 \begin_layout Standard
5616 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5617 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5618 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5620 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5621 you read all of section
5622 \begin_inset space ~
5626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5628 reference "sec:Nesting"
5635 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5637 \begin_inset Index idx
5640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5656 \begin_layout Standard
5657 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5661 paragraph environment.
5662 It has the following properties:
5665 \begin_layout Itemize
5666 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5670 \begin_layout Itemize
5672 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5675 \begin_layout Itemize
5676 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5680 \begin_layout Itemize
5681 The items can have any length.
5683 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5684 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5691 \begin_layout Itemize
5696 environment inside another
5700 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5704 \begin_layout Itemize
5705 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5708 \begin_layout Itemize
5710 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5713 \begin_layout Itemize
5715 \begin_inset space ~
5719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5721 reference "sec:Nesting"
5725 for a full explanation of nesting.
5729 \begin_layout Standard
5730 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5739 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5742 \begin_layout Standard
5743 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5744 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5747 \begin_layout Itemize
5748 The label for the first level
5752 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5756 \begin_layout Itemize
5757 The label for the second level is a dash.
5761 \begin_layout Itemize
5762 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5766 \begin_layout Itemize
5767 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5771 \begin_layout Itemize
5772 Back out to the third level.
5776 \begin_layout Itemize
5777 Back to the second level.
5781 \begin_layout Itemize
5782 Back to the outermost level.
5785 \begin_layout Standard
5786 These are the default labels for an
5791 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5793 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5796 dialog in the submenu
5801 \begin_inset Index idx
5804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5810 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5814 \begin_layout Standard
5815 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5816 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5818 \begin_inset space ~
5822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5824 reference "sec:Nesting"
5831 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5833 \begin_inset Index idx
5836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5843 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5845 name "sec:Enumerate"
5852 \begin_layout Standard
5857 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5858 It has these properties:
5861 \begin_layout Enumerate
5862 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5866 \begin_layout Enumerate
5867 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5871 \begin_layout Enumerate
5873 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5876 \begin_layout Enumerate
5881 environment resets the counter to one.
5884 \begin_layout Enumerate
5897 \begin_layout Enumerate
5898 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5899 Items can have any length.
5902 \begin_layout Enumerate
5903 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5906 \begin_layout Enumerate
5907 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5910 \begin_layout Enumerate
5911 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5915 \begin_layout Standard
5924 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5926 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5927 labels the four different levels in an
5934 \begin_layout Enumerate
5935 The first level of an
5939 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5943 \begin_layout Enumerate
5944 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5948 \begin_layout Enumerate
5949 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5953 \begin_layout Enumerate
5954 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5957 \begin_layout Enumerate
5958 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5963 \begin_layout Enumerate
5964 Back to the third level
5968 \begin_layout Enumerate
5969 Back to the second level.
5973 \begin_layout Enumerate
5974 Back to the outermost level.
5977 \begin_layout Standard
5978 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5982 environment, see section
5983 \begin_inset space ~
5987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5989 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
5994 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
5998 \begin_layout Standard
5999 There is more to nesting
6003 environments than we've stated here.
6004 You should read section
6005 \begin_inset space ~
6009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6011 reference "sec:Nesting"
6015 to learn more about nesting.
6018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6020 \begin_inset Index idx
6023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6032 \begin_layout Standard
6033 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6037 list has no fixed label.
6038 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6047 of the first line as the label.
6051 \begin_layout Description
6052 Example: This is an example of the
6059 \begin_layout Standard
6061 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6065 \begin_layout Standard
6067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6074 it is meant that the first usage of the
6078 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6080 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6088 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6093 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6094 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6096 \begin_inset space ~
6102 \begin_inset space ~
6106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6108 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6112 for more information.) Here is an example:
6115 \begin_layout Description
6117 \begin_inset space ~
6120 Example: This one shows how to use a
6123 \begin_inset space ~
6135 \begin_layout Description
6136 Usage: You should use the
6140 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6141 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6143 It's not a good idea to use a
6147 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6148 You're better off using
6160 paragraphs into them.
6163 \begin_layout Description
6164 Nesting: You can nest
6168 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6172 \begin_layout Standard
6173 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6174 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6175 them from the first line.
6178 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6180 \begin_inset Index idx
6183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6192 \begin_layout Standard
6197 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6198 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6202 \begin_layout Standard
6211 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6213 Here are its properties:
6216 \begin_layout Labeling
6217 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6219 \begin_inset space ~
6222 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6231 of each line as the item label.
6236 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6237 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6238 space as described above.
6241 \begin_layout Labeling
6242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6243 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6244 uses different margins for the item label and the
6245 body of the item text.
6246 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6247 label width plus a little extra space.
6251 \begin_layout Labeling
6252 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6254 \begin_inset space ~
6257 width \SpecialChar LyX
6258 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6259 If the label width is larger, the label
6260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6267 into the first line.
6268 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6269 margin of the rest of the item text.
6272 \begin_layout Labeling
6273 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6275 \begin_inset space ~
6278 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6283 environment has the same left margin.
6284 \begin_inset Newline newline
6287 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6290 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6292 \begin_inset space ~
6297 dialog (toolbar button
6300 arg "layout-paragraph"
6307 \begin_inset space ~
6312 determines the default label width.
6313 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6322 multiple times instead.
6323 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6333 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6336 \begin_inset space ~
6341 every time you alter a label in a
6346 \begin_inset Newline newline
6349 The predefined default width is the length of
6350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6358 \begin_inset space ~
6364 \begin_layout Standard
6369 list the same way as the
6373 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6379 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6383 \begin_layout Standard
6388 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6389 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6391 \begin_inset space ~
6395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6397 reference "sec:Nesting"
6401 to learn about nesting.
6404 \begin_layout Standard
6405 There is yet another feature of the
6409 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6410 left-justifies the item labels by
6412 You can use additional
6416 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6417 justifies the item label.
6422 are documented in section
6423 \begin_inset space ~
6427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6429 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6434 Here are some examples:
6437 \begin_layout Labeling
6438 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6439 Left The default for
6446 \begin_layout Labeling
6447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6448 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6455 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6458 \begin_layout Labeling
6459 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6460 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6464 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6471 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6474 \begin_layout Subsection
6476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6478 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6483 \begin_inset Index idx
6486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6495 \begin_layout Standard
6496 The features described in this section require that the module
6498 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6500 is loaded in the document settings.
6501 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6507 \begin_inset Index idx
6510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6512 -packages ! enumitem
6520 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6521 Custom Enumerate Lists
6522 \begin_inset Index idx
6525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6526 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6534 \begin_layout Standard
6536 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6539 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6542 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6543 There you add the command
6546 \begin_layout Standard
6554 \begin_layout Standard
6566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6567 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6568 Code, look at section
6569 \begin_inset space ~
6573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6575 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6588 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6595 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6596 For capital Roman numerals replace
6608 in the command above.
6609 For Arabic numerals use
6617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6624 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6639 \begin_layout Standard
6641 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6649 You can only number 26
6650 \begin_inset space ~
6653 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6661 \begin_layout Standard
6662 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6663 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6666 \begin_layout Standard
6667 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6670 \begin_layout Enumerate
6671 \begin_inset Argument 1
6674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6700 \begin_layout Enumerate
6701 \begin_inset Argument 1
6704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6727 \begin_layout Enumerate
6732 \begin_layout Enumerate
6733 \begin_inset Argument 1
6736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6760 \begin_layout Enumerate
6761 \begin_inset Argument 1
6764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6790 \begin_layout Standard
6791 For this list these commands were used:
6794 \begin_layout Standard
6805 \begin_inset Newline newline
6813 \begin_inset Newline newline
6821 \begin_inset Newline newline
6831 \begin_layout Standard
6838 makes the label emphasized and
6847 \begin_layout Standard
6848 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6856 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6857 lists until you change the definition.
6865 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6867 \begin_inset Index idx
6870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6871 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6879 \begin_layout Standard
6880 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6883 \begin_layout Enumerate
6884 \begin_inset Argument 1
6887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6906 \begin_inset Note Note
6909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6910 goes back to default numbering
6918 \begin_layout Enumerate
6922 \begin_layout Standard
6926 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6930 \begin_layout Standard
6931 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6936 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
6937 to indicate that it is a resumed
6938 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
6939 , but in the output.
6942 \begin_layout Standard
6943 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6951 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
6960 \begin_layout Standard
6961 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6963 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6964 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6965 of a normal enumeration.
6966 There, insert the command
6969 \begin_layout Standard
6975 \begin_layout Standard
6980 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6984 \begin_layout Enumerate
6988 \begin_layout Enumerate
6992 \begin_layout Standard
6993 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6996 \begin_layout Enumerate
6997 \begin_inset Argument 1
7000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7016 This enumeration starts at 4
7019 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7021 \begin_inset Index idx
7024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7033 \begin_layout Standard
7034 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7036 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7039 \begin_layout Itemize
7043 \begin_layout Itemize
7044 with standard spacing
7047 \begin_layout Standard
7048 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7050 Add there the command
7054 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7057 \begin_layout Itemize
7058 \begin_inset Argument 1
7061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7080 \begin_layout Itemize
7084 \begin_layout Itemize
7088 \begin_layout Standard
7089 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7096 \begin_inset Index idx
7099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7101 -packages ! enumitem
7107 For more information see its documentation,
7108 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7117 \begin_layout Standard
7118 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7120 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7121 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7122 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7125 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7128 \begin_layout Enumerate
7129 \begin_inset Argument 1
7132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7140 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7153 \begin_layout Enumerate
7154 with negative indentation
7157 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7158 Further Customization
7159 \begin_inset Index idx
7162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7163 Lists ! Customization
7171 \begin_layout Standard
7172 You can also change the style of description lists.
7176 \begin_layout Standard
7182 \begin_layout Standard
7183 changes the description label font, the command
7186 \begin_layout Standard
7192 \begin_layout Standard
7193 sets the list style.
7196 \begin_layout Standard
7197 An example where the command
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7205 itshape, style=nextline
7208 \begin_layout Standard
7212 \begin_layout Description
7214 \begin_inset space ~
7218 \begin_inset Argument 1
7221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7227 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7229 itshape, style=nextline
7239 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7240 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7244 \begin_layout Description
7246 \begin_inset space ~
7249 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7250 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7251 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7254 \begin_layout Standard
7255 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7261 \begin_inset Index idx
7264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7266 -packages ! enumitem
7272 For more information see its documentation
7273 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7282 \begin_layout Subsection
7284 \begin_inset Index idx
7287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7296 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7298 \begin_inset space ~
7301 Address: An Overview
7304 \begin_layout Standard
7305 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7306 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7314 \begin_inset space ~
7320 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7321 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7322 gags on the document.
7323 In contrast, you can use the
7330 \begin_inset space ~
7335 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7336 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7340 \begin_layout Standard
7341 Of course, you're not limited to using
7348 \begin_inset space ~
7357 \begin_inset space ~
7362 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7363 some European academic papers.
7366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7370 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7377 \begin_layout Standard
7382 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7383 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7387 \begin_inset space ~
7392 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7393 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7394 Here's an example of each:
7397 \begin_layout Right Address
7399 \begin_inset Newline newline
7403 \begin_inset Newline newline
7407 \begin_inset Newline newline
7410 When is it? What is today?
7413 \begin_layout Standard
7417 \begin_inset space ~
7423 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7425 the largest block of text on a single line.
7426 Here's an example of the
7433 \begin_layout Address
7435 \begin_inset Newline newline
7438 Where do I send this
7439 \begin_inset Newline newline
7442 Your post office and country
7445 \begin_layout Standard
7446 As you can see, both
7453 \begin_inset space ~
7458 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7463 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7464 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7470 This makes sense, since
7478 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7479 Thus, you have to use
7486 arg "newline-insert newline"
7491 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7492 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7494 \begin_inset space ~
7498 \begin_inset space ~
7503 ) to start a new line in an
7510 \begin_inset space ~
7518 \begin_layout Subsection
7522 \begin_layout Standard
7523 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7524 or list of references.
7526 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7529 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7531 \begin_inset Index idx
7534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7543 \begin_layout Standard
7548 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7549 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7550 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7551 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7565 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7566 The book document classes ignores the
7570 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7574 in a letter document class.
7577 \begin_layout Standard
7582 environment does several things for you.
7583 First, it puts the centered label
7584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7592 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7594 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7595 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7596 the subsequent text.
7597 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7599 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7603 \begin_layout Standard
7604 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7608 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7609 The new paragraph will still be in the
7614 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7615 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7618 \begin_layout Standard
7619 \begin_inset Float figure
7624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7626 \begin_inset Graphics
7627 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7635 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7640 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7661 \begin_layout Standard
7662 We would love to demonstrate the
7666 environment, but since this document is in the
7667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7674 class, we can't do this.
7675 We inserted it therefore as figure
7676 \begin_inset space ~
7680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7682 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7687 If you have never heard of an
7688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7695 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7712 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7719 \begin_layout Standard
7724 environment is used to list references.
7725 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7726 only use it at the end of the document.
7738 \begin_layout Standard
7739 When you first open a
7743 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7744 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7760 depending on the document class.
7761 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7762 Each paragraph of the
7766 environment is a bibliography entry.
7771 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7772 Each new paragraph is still in the
7779 \begin_layout Standard
7780 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7781 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7783 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7785 handling, have a look at section
7786 \begin_inset space ~
7790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7792 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7799 \begin_layout Subsection
7800 Special Environments
7803 \begin_layout Standard
7805 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7806 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7809 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7814 \begin_inset Index idx
7817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7827 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7834 \begin_layout Standard
7840 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7842 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7847 key as a fixed whitespace.
7851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7864 \begin_inset space ~
7869 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7887 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7890 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7893 arg "newline-insert newline"
7910 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7911 So, when you finish using the
7916 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7917 Also, you can nest the
7922 environment inside of others.
7925 \begin_layout Standard
7926 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7929 \begin_layout Itemize
7933 arg "newline-insert newline"
7936 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7941 \begin_inset space \space{}
7951 arg "newline-insert newline"
7957 \begin_layout Itemize
7961 arg "newline-insert newline"
7971 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7977 \begin_layout Itemize
7978 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7979 You must put at least one
7983 in any line you want blank.
7984 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
7988 \begin_layout Itemize
7989 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7993 since that will insert
7998 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8001 arg "self-insert \""
8007 \begin_layout Standard
8011 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8015 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8019 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8023 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8027 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8028 printf("Hello World!
8033 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8037 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8041 \begin_layout Standard
8042 This is just the standard
8043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8054 \begin_layout Standard
8060 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8062 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8063 as if you used a typewriter.
8064 \begin_inset Index idx
8067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8068 Paragraph environments|)
8073 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8076 Program Code Listings
8081 \begin_inset space ~
8089 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8093 \begin_inset Index idx
8096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8105 \begin_layout Standard
8110 environment is similar to the
8115 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8116 computer console text.
8121 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8135 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8136 you can have empty lines.
8149 \begin_layout Itemize
8150 have a certain language and a text style
8153 \begin_layout Itemize
8154 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8155 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8156 and \SpecialChar TeX
8160 \begin_layout Standard
8161 Because of these properties
8165 works like a typewriter.
8169 \begin_layout Verbatim
8174 \begin_layout Verbatim
8178 The following 2 lines are empty:
8181 \begin_layout Verbatim
8185 \begin_layout Verbatim
8189 \begin_layout Verbatim
8191 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8196 \begin_layout Standard
8201 environment is identical to
8205 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8206 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8213 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8218 \begin_layout Section
8219 Nesting Environments
8220 \begin_inset Index idx
8223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8224 Nesting ! Environments
8230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8239 \begin_layout Subsection
8243 \begin_layout Standard
8245 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8247 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8249 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8251 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8263 \begin_layout Enumerate
8267 \begin_layout Enumerate
8272 \begin_layout Enumerate
8276 \begin_layout Enumerate
8281 \begin_layout Enumerate
8285 \begin_layout Standard
8286 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8287 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8289 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8291 \begin_inset space ~
8295 \begin_inset space ~
8303 \begin_inset space ~
8307 \begin_inset space ~
8312 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8314 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8317 arg "depth-increment"
8323 arg "depth-decrement"
8337 arg "depth-increment"
8343 arg "depth-decrement"
8347 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8348 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8352 \begin_layout Standard
8353 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8354 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8355 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8356 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8357 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8360 \begin_layout Standard
8361 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8363 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8365 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8368 \begin_layout Subsection
8369 What You Can and Can't Nest
8372 \begin_layout Standard
8373 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8374 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8377 \begin_layout Standard
8378 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8379 than a simple yes or no.
8380 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8383 \begin_layout Itemize
8384 Completely unnestable
8387 \begin_layout Itemize
8388 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8392 \begin_layout Itemize
8393 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8397 \begin_layout Standard
8398 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8399 environments have them:
8402 \begin_layout Description
8403 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8404 Can't nest into them.
8408 \begin_layout Itemize
8414 \begin_layout Itemize
8420 \begin_layout Itemize
8426 \begin_layout Itemize
8432 \begin_layout Itemize
8439 \begin_layout Description
8441 \begin_inset space ~
8444 Nestable You can nest them.
8445 You can nest other things into them.
8449 \begin_layout Itemize
8455 \begin_layout Itemize
8461 \begin_layout Itemize
8467 \begin_layout Itemize
8473 \begin_layout Itemize
8479 \begin_layout Itemize
8485 \begin_layout Itemize
8491 \begin_layout Itemize
8498 \begin_layout Itemize
8504 \begin_layout Itemize
8511 \begin_layout Description
8512 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8513 You can't nest anything into them.
8517 \begin_layout Itemize
8523 \begin_layout Itemize
8529 \begin_layout Itemize
8535 \begin_layout Itemize
8541 \begin_layout Itemize
8547 \begin_layout Itemize
8553 \begin_layout Itemize
8559 \begin_layout Itemize
8565 \begin_layout Itemize
8571 \begin_layout Itemize
8577 \begin_layout Itemize
8583 \begin_layout Itemize
8589 \begin_layout Itemize
8595 \begin_layout Itemize
8599 \begin_inset space ~
8605 \begin_layout Itemize
8612 \begin_layout Standard
8613 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8621 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8631 \begin_inset space ~
8634 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8635 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8636 nested section headings violate this.
8644 \begin_layout Subsection
8645 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8646 \begin_inset Index idx
8649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8650 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8658 \begin_layout Standard
8659 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8660 affected by nesting anyhow.
8664 \begin_layout Itemize
8668 \begin_layout Itemize
8672 \begin_layout Itemize
8676 \begin_layout Standard
8678 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8686 Figures and tables in
8690 are not affected by this.
8695 Have a look at section
8696 \begin_inset space ~
8700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8702 reference "sec:Floats"
8706 for more information about
8713 \begin_layout Standard
8715 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8716 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8720 \begin_layout Standard
8721 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8729 of its own, it behaves just like a
8730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8737 paragraph environment.
8738 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8742 \begin_layout Standard
8743 Here's an example with a table:
8746 \begin_layout Enumerate
8751 \begin_layout Enumerate
8752 This is (a) and it's nested.
8756 \begin_layout Standard
8757 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8763 \begin_layout Standard
8765 \begin_inset Tabular
8766 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8767 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8768 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8769 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8853 \begin_layout Standard
8854 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8861 \begin_layout Enumerate
8863 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8867 \begin_layout Enumerate
8871 \begin_layout Standard
8872 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8875 \begin_layout Enumerate
8880 \begin_layout Enumerate
8881 This is (a) and it's nested.
8885 \begin_layout Standard
8886 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8892 \begin_layout Standard
8894 \begin_inset Tabular
8895 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8896 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8897 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8898 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8982 \begin_layout Standard
8983 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8989 \begin_layout Enumerate
8996 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8999 \begin_layout Enumerate
9003 \begin_layout Standard
9004 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9008 \begin_layout Standard
9009 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9012 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9015 \begin_layout Enumerate
9020 \begin_layout Enumerate
9021 This is (a) and it's nested.
9024 \begin_layout Standard
9025 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9031 \begin_layout Standard
9033 \begin_inset Tabular
9034 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9035 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9036 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9037 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9122 \begin_layout Standard
9123 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9129 \begin_layout Enumerate
9131 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9138 \begin_layout Enumerate
9142 \begin_layout Standard
9143 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9149 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9150 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9154 \begin_layout Subsection
9155 Usage and General Features
9158 \begin_layout Standard
9159 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9160 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9169 is the innermost possible depth.
9170 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9173 \begin_layout Enumerate
9174 level #1 – outermost
9178 \begin_layout Enumerate
9183 \begin_layout Enumerate
9188 \begin_layout Enumerate
9193 \begin_layout Itemize
9198 \begin_layout Itemize
9207 \begin_layout Standard
9208 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9209 both of them in the example.
9210 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9220 For example, if we tried to nest another
9225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9232 , we would get errors.
9235 \begin_layout Subsection
9237 \begin_inset Index idx
9240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9249 \begin_layout Standard
9250 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9251 We have several examples of nested environments.
9252 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9256 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9257 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9260 \begin_layout Labeling
9261 \labelwidthstring MMM
9262 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9271 \begin_layout Labeling
9272 \labelwidthstring MMM
9273 #2-a This is level #2.
9274 We created it by using
9277 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9283 arg "depth-increment"
9290 \begin_layout Labeling
9291 \labelwidthstring MMM
9292 #3-a This is level #3.
9293 This time, we just enter
9300 arg "depth-increment"
9304 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9308 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9314 arg "depth-increment"
9321 \begin_layout Standard
9326 environment, nested inside of
9327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9335 So, it's at level #4.
9336 We did this by entering
9339 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9345 arg "depth-increment"
9348 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9353 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9369 \begin_layout Standard
9374 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9377 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9383 \begin_layout Labeling
9384 \labelwidthstring MMM
9385 #4-a This is level #4.
9389 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9392 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9397 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9401 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9406 keep nesting things inside
9407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9418 \begin_layout Labeling
9419 \labelwidthstring MMM
9420 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9425 \begin_layout Labeling
9426 \labelwidthstring MMM
9427 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9428 and this is level #6.
9429 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9433 \begin_layout Labeling
9434 \labelwidthstring MMM
9435 #5-b Back to level #5.
9439 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9445 arg "depth-decrement"
9452 \begin_layout Labeling
9453 \labelwidthstring MMM
9457 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9463 arg "depth-decrement"
9466 , we're back at level #4.
9470 \begin_layout Labeling
9471 \labelwidthstring MMM
9472 #3-b Back to level #3.
9473 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9477 \begin_layout Labeling
9478 \labelwidthstring MMM
9479 #2-b Back to level #2.
9484 \begin_layout Labeling
9485 \labelwidthstring MMM
9486 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9487 After this sentence, we will enter
9491 and change the paragraph environment back to
9498 \begin_layout Standard
9499 We could have also used the
9515 environment in place of the
9520 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9523 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9524 Example 2: Inheritance
9527 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9528 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9531 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9540 arg "depth-increment"
9544 \begin_inset Newline newline
9547 which, we will change to the
9555 \begin_layout Enumerate
9560 environment, at level #2.
9563 \begin_layout Enumerate
9564 Notice how the nested
9568 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9572 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9576 \begin_layout Standard
9577 We ended this example by entering
9582 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9586 and reset the nesting depth by using
9589 arg "depth-decrement"
9595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9596 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9605 \begin_inset Argument 1
9608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9609 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9617 \begin_layout Enumerate
9618 This is level #1, in an
9622 paragraph environment.
9623 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9627 \begin_layout Enumerate
9632 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9638 arg "depth-increment"
9642 Now, what happens if we nest an
9646 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9647 label be? An asterisk?
9651 \begin_layout Itemize
9661 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9662 So, its label is a bullet.
9663 (We got here by using
9666 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9672 arg "depth-increment"
9675 , then changing the environment to
9683 \begin_layout Itemize
9684 Here's level #4, produced using
9687 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9693 arg "depth-increment"
9697 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9702 \begin_layout Enumerate
9705 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9710 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9714 , because we are in the
9722 environment (that is, it is an
9737 \begin_layout Enumerate
9742 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9743 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9747 \begin_layout Enumerate
9748 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9751 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9754 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9757 \begin_layout Enumerate
9761 arg "depth-decrement"
9764 to decrease the depth after the next
9767 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9774 \begin_layout Enumerate
9776 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9781 \begin_layout Enumerate
9783 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9784 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9788 \begin_layout Enumerate
9789 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9798 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9803 reset the counter for the label.
9807 \begin_layout Enumerate
9811 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9817 arg "depth-decrement"
9820 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9821 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9822 into the twofold-nested
9830 \begin_layout Enumerate
9831 The same thing happens if we do another
9834 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9840 arg "depth-decrement"
9843 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9846 \begin_layout Standard
9847 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9852 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9867 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9874 The same rule applies for the
9878 environment, as well.
9881 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9882 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9885 \begin_layout Enumerate
9886 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9887 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9888 the same detail with how we did it.
9897 \begin_layout Standard
9905 arg "depth-increment"
9912 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9913 the example in parentheses someplace.
9914 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9915 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9916 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9920 \begin_layout Enumerate
9925 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9930 Now we will add verse.
9931 \begin_inset Newline newline
9934 It will get much worse.
9935 \begin_inset Newline newline
9945 arg "depth-increment"
9956 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9957 \begin_inset Newline newline
9960 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9961 \begin_inset Newline newline
9967 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9980 \begin_layout Standard
9981 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9987 \begin_layout Standard
9989 \begin_inset Tabular
9990 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9991 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9992 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9993 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10078 \begin_layout Verse
10082 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10092 arg "depth-increment"
10098 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10104 \begin_inset Newline newline
10112 arg "depth-decrement"
10119 \begin_layout Enumerate
10124 : level #1) This is another item.
10125 Note that selecting a
10129 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10130 3 times to put the table inside the
10138 \begin_layout Quotation
10139 We're now ending the
10143 list and changing to
10148 We're still at level #1.
10149 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10150 The next set of paragraphs is a
10151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10158 We will nest both the
10165 \begin_inset space ~
10170 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10174 for the letter body.
10178 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10181 to preserve the depth.
10182 Remember that you need to use
10185 arg "newline-insert newline"
10188 to create multiple lines inside the
10195 \begin_inset space ~
10205 \begin_layout Right Address
10207 \begin_inset Newline newline
10210 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10211 \begin_inset Newline newline
10217 \begin_layout Address
10219 \begin_inset space ~
10225 \begin_layout Quotation
10226 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10230 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10231 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10232 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10233 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10234 as soon as possible.
10235 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10238 \begin_layout Quotation
10239 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10240 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10241 with your order, along with payment.
10244 \begin_layout Quotation
10245 We thank you again for your patience.
10248 \begin_layout Address
10250 \begin_inset Newline newline
10257 \begin_layout Quotation
10258 That ends that example!
10261 \begin_layout Standard
10262 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10263 gives you a lot of power with just
10265 We could have easily nested an
10286 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10289 \begin_layout Subsection
10291 \begin_inset Index idx
10294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10295 Nesting ! Separation
10301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10303 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10310 \begin_layout Standard
10311 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10313 For example you need two different enumerations:
10316 \begin_layout Enumerate
10321 \begin_layout Enumerate
10326 \begin_layout Enumerate
10330 \begin_layout Standard
10331 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10337 \begin_layout Itemize
10343 \begin_layout Standard
10344 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10350 \begin_layout Enumerate
10354 \begin_layout Enumerate
10358 \begin_layout Enumerate
10362 \begin_layout Standard
10363 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10364 list item and use the menu
10366 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10367 Start New Environment
10370 This inserts a plain separator (red line in LyX) and behind it the new
10372 Alternatively set the cursor at the end of a list item and press
10375 arg "paragraph-break"
10379 This inserts a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
10380 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10381 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10382 One can change the separator type by right-clicking on it.
10385 \begin_layout Standard
10386 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10389 arg "paragraph-break"
10392 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10395 \begin_layout Section
10396 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10397 \begin_inset Index idx
10400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10409 \begin_layout Standard
10410 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10411 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10413 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10414 be broken at the end of a line.
10415 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10419 \begin_layout Subsection
10421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10423 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10428 \begin_inset Index idx
10431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10440 \begin_layout Standard
10441 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10442 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10443 ) not to break the line at
10445 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10448 \begin_layout Quote
10449 Further documentation is given in section
10450 \begin_inset Newline newline
10454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10456 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10464 \begin_layout Standard
10465 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10480 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10489 A protected space is set with
10491 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10492 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10494 \begin_inset space ~
10502 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10508 \begin_layout Subsection
10510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10512 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10517 \begin_inset Index idx
10520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10521 Spacing ! Horizontal
10529 \begin_layout Standard
10530 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10532 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10533 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10537 The length units are listed in Appendix
10538 \begin_inset space ~
10542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10544 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10551 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10555 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10560 \begin_inset Index idx
10563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10564 Spaces ! Inter-word
10572 \begin_layout Standard
10573 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10574 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10575 at the ends of sentences.
10576 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10577 automatically takes care about this.
10578 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10579 followed by a period; see section
10580 \begin_inset space ~
10584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10586 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10591 To insert a normal space, select
10593 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10594 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10596 \begin_inset space ~
10604 arg "space-insert normal"
10610 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10614 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10619 \begin_inset Index idx
10622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10631 \begin_layout Standard
10633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10640 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10649 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10650 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10651 inside abbreviations:
10654 \begin_layout Quote
10656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10660 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10663 \begin_layout Standard
10664 or between values and units.
10665 Compare for example this:
10666 \begin_inset Newline newline
10670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10674 \begin_inset Newline newline
10677 10 kg (normal space
10680 \begin_layout Standard
10681 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10684 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10686 \begin_inset space ~
10694 arg "space-insert thin"
10700 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10704 \begin_layout Standard
10705 You can also insert the following space types:
10708 \begin_layout Description
10710 \begin_inset space ~
10714 \begin_inset space ~
10717 space A line with a
10718 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10722 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10726 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10729 negative thin space between the arrows.
10732 \begin_layout Description
10734 \begin_inset space ~
10738 \begin_inset space ~
10741 space A line with a
10742 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10746 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10750 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10753 negative medium space between the arrows.
10756 \begin_layout Description
10758 \begin_inset space ~
10762 \begin_inset space ~
10765 space A line with a
10766 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10770 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10774 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10777 negative thick space between the arrows.
10780 \begin_layout Description
10782 \begin_inset space ~
10786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10790 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10794 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10798 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10802 \begin_inset space ~
10806 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10809 em) space between the arrows.
10812 \begin_layout Description
10814 \begin_inset space ~
10818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10822 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10826 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10830 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10834 \begin_inset space ~
10838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10841 em) space between the arrows.
10844 \begin_layout Description
10846 \begin_inset space ~
10850 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10854 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10858 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10862 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10866 \begin_inset space ~
10870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10873 em) space between the arrows.
10876 \begin_layout Description
10878 \begin_inset space ~
10882 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10886 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10891 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10895 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10898 cm space between the arrows.
10901 \begin_layout Standard
10903 \begin_inset space ~
10907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10909 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10913 lists the different space sizes.
10916 \begin_layout Standard
10917 \begin_inset Float table
10922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10923 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10928 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10932 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10942 \begin_inset Tabular
10943 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10944 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10945 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10946 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11010 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11058 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11062 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11170 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11219 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11221 \begin_inset Index idx
11224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11233 \begin_layout Standard
11234 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11235 feature for adding extra space
11236 in a uniform fashion.
11237 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11238 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11239 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11240 equally between themselves.
11243 \begin_layout Standard
11244 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11247 \begin_layout Quote
11249 This is on the left side
11250 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11253 This is on the right
11256 \begin_layout Quote
11259 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11263 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11269 \begin_layout Quote
11272 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11276 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11280 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11286 \begin_layout Standard
11287 That was an example in the
11293 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11297 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11301 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11304 is one in a standard paragraph.
11305 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11309 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11312 \begin_layout Standard
11313 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11316 \begin_inset space ~
11321 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11324 \begin_layout Standard
11326 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11330 \begin_inset space ~
11336 \begin_layout Standard
11338 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11342 \begin_inset space ~
11348 \begin_layout Standard
11350 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11354 \begin_inset space ~
11360 \begin_layout Standard
11362 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11366 \begin_inset space ~
11372 \begin_layout Standard
11374 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11378 \begin_inset space ~
11384 \begin_layout Standard
11386 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11390 \begin_inset space ~
11396 \begin_layout Standard
11397 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11405 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11409 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11411 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11412 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11416 option in the space dialog.
11424 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11428 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11433 \begin_inset Index idx
11436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11445 \begin_layout Standard
11446 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11447 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11450 \begin_layout Standard
11451 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11454 What is correct English?:
11455 \begin_inset Newline newline
11459 \begin_inset Newline newline
11463 \begin_inset space ~
11466 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11467 \begin_inset Newline newline
11471 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11482 \begin_inset Newline newline
11486 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11497 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11503 \begin_layout Standard
11505 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11510 \begin_inset space ~
11514 \begin_inset space ~
11518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11522 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11524 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11525 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11529 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11535 \begin_inset space ~
11539 \begin_inset space ~
11543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11546 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11555 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11556 That is why it is named
11557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11565 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11566 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11570 \begin_layout Subsection
11572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11574 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11579 \begin_inset Index idx
11582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11591 \begin_layout Standard
11592 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11594 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11595 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11597 \begin_inset space ~
11603 There you find the following sizes:
11606 \begin_layout Standard
11619 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11620 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11625 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11627 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11628 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11630 \begin_inset space ~
11636 \begin_inset Index idx
11639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11640 Document ! Settings
11645 for the paragraph separation.
11646 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11657 \begin_layout Standard
11663 \begin_inset Index idx
11666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11672 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11673 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11678 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11679 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11688 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11697 s are described in section
11698 \begin_inset space ~
11702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11704 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11713 If there are several
11717 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11718 You can therefore use
11722 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11725 \begin_layout Standard
11730 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11731 \begin_inset space ~
11735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11737 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11744 \begin_layout Standard
11745 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11755 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11756 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11768 \begin_layout Subsection
11769 Paragraph Alignment
11770 \begin_inset Index idx
11773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11774 Paragraph ! Alignment
11782 \begin_layout Standard
11783 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11785 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11788 dialog (toolbar button
11791 arg "layout-paragraph"
11795 There are five possibilities:
11798 \begin_layout Itemize
11806 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11812 \begin_layout Itemize
11820 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11826 \begin_layout Itemize
11834 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11840 \begin_layout Itemize
11848 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11854 \begin_layout Itemize
11862 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11868 \begin_layout Standard
11869 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11870 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11871 the left and right margins.
11872 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11875 \begin_layout Standard
11877 This paragraph is right aligned,
11880 \begin_layout Standard
11882 this one is centered,
11885 \begin_layout Standard
11887 this one is left aligned.
11890 \begin_layout Subsection
11892 \begin_inset Index idx
11895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11896 Page breaks ! Forced
11902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11904 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11911 \begin_layout Standard
11912 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11913 does the page breaks in your document, you can
11914 force a page break where you want one.
11915 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11916 is good at page breaking.
11917 Only if you use a lot of
11921 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11922 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11925 \begin_layout Standard
11926 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11927 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11931 have to change the page breaking.
11934 \begin_layout Standard
11935 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11937 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11939 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11940 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11942 \begin_inset space ~
11948 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11950 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11951 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11953 \begin_inset space ~
11958 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11960 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11961 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11964 \begin_layout Standard
11965 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11966 at the top of a page.
11967 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11969 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11970 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11971 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11975 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11979 to learn more about
11986 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11988 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11990 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11995 \begin_inset Index idx
11998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11999 Page breaks ! Clear
12007 \begin_layout Standard
12008 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12009 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12010 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12011 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12012 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12015 \begin_layout Standard
12016 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12018 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12019 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12021 \begin_inset space ~
12027 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12029 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12030 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12032 \begin_inset space ~
12036 \begin_inset space ~
12041 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12042 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12045 \begin_layout Subsection
12047 \begin_inset Index idx
12050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12059 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12066 \begin_layout Standard
12067 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12069 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12071 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12072 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12074 \begin_inset space ~
12078 \begin_inset space ~
12086 arg "newline-insert newline"
12090 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12092 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12093 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12095 \begin_inset space ~
12099 \begin_inset space ~
12107 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12110 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12112 This is useful to avoid
12113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12120 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12123 \begin_layout Standard
12124 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12125 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12127 very good at line breaking.
12128 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12129 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12130 \begin_inset space ~
12134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12136 reference "sec:Quote"
12141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12143 reference "sec:Verse"
12148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12150 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12157 \begin_layout Subsection
12159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12161 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12166 \begin_inset Index idx
12169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12178 \begin_layout Standard
12180 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12191 \begin_layout Standard
12195 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12196 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12198 \begin_inset space ~
12203 you can insert horizontal lines.
12204 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12205 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12206 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12209 \begin_layout Standard
12211 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12222 \begin_layout Section
12223 Characters and Symbols
12226 \begin_layout Standard
12227 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12228 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12229 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12237 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12241 for information on how this is done.
12244 \begin_layout Standard
12245 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12250 dialog via the menu
12252 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12253 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12259 \begin_layout Standard
12260 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12268 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12269 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12271 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12279 \begin_layout Section
12280 Fonts and Text Styles
12281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12283 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12290 \begin_layout Subsection
12292 \begin_inset Index idx
12295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12304 \begin_layout Standard
12305 There are two types of fonts:
12308 \begin_layout Description
12310 \begin_inset space ~
12314 \begin_inset Index idx
12317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12323 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12324 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12328 characters) in the font.
12329 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12330 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12331 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12332 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12333 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12334 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12335 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12336 \begin_inset Newline newline
12339 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12340 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12341 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12342 sizes than at small ones.
12343 \begin_inset Newline newline
12357 \begin_inset space ~
12365 \begin_layout Description
12367 \begin_inset space ~
12371 \begin_inset Index idx
12374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12380 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12381 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12382 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12383 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12384 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12385 image manipulation program.
12386 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12387 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12388 \begin_inset space ~
12391 pixels high up to 34
12392 \begin_inset space ~
12395 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12396 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12397 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12399 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12400 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12401 \begin_inset Newline newline
12404 Bitmap fonts are named
12407 \begin_inset space ~
12412 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12415 \begin_layout Standard
12416 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12417 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12418 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12419 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12420 use scalable fonts.
12423 \begin_layout Standard
12424 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12427 \begin_layout Standard
12428 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12429 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12430 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12431 font to emphasize text, you use an
12432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12440 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12442 In \SpecialChar LyX
12443 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12447 \begin_layout Subsection
12450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12452 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12459 \begin_layout Standard
12460 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12461 used its own fonts.
12462 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12463 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12466 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12467 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12468 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12469 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12470 to a word processor.
12471 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12472 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12473 files are very portable across
12474 different machines.
12475 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12476 has increased a lot
12477 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12480 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12482 \begin_inset space ~
12486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12488 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12493 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12494 code in the document
12495 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12498 \begin_layout Standard
12499 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12500 engines that are also able directly
12501 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12503 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12505 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12507 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12508 that is installed on your system.
12509 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12512 \begin_layout Standard
12513 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12521 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12522 es; so you might have to experiment.
12530 \begin_layout Standard
12531 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12540 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12541 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12542 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12543 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12552 \begin_layout Subsection
12553 Document Font and Font size
12554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12556 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12561 \begin_inset Index idx
12564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12571 \begin_inset Index idx
12574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12583 \begin_layout Standard
12584 You can set the document fonts in the
12586 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12590 \begin_inset Index idx
12593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12594 Document ! Settings
12604 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12605 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12608 \begin_inset space ~
12617 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12619 \begin_inset space ~
12622 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12625 \begin_layout Standard
12630 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12631 This requires that you use
12643 as the output format, i.
12644 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12648 \begin_inset space \space{}
12651 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12652 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12653 installed (see section
12654 \begin_inset space ~
12658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12660 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12665 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12667 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12668 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12670 \begin_inset space ~
12673 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12674 cannot determine the family.
12675 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12676 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12679 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12682 \begin_layout Standard
12683 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12684 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12689 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12695 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12696 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12704 \begin_inset space ~
12710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12723 European Computer Modern
12726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12733 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12736 \begin_layout Standard
12745 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12746 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12751 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12754 \begin_inset space ~
12759 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12765 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12766 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12769 \begin_layout Itemize
12773 \begin_inset space ~
12778 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12791 \begin_inset space ~
12796 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12797 community in order to replace
12801 as the default font.
12802 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12803 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12806 \begin_inset space ~
12819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12820 One difference is improved kerning.
12828 \begin_layout Itemize
12832 \begin_inset space ~
12836 \begin_inset space ~
12841 fonts in (the rare) case that
12844 \begin_inset space ~
12849 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12864 Virtual means that it
12865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12876 -glyphs from other fonts.
12877 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12899 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12905 \begin_inset Index idx
12908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12910 -packages ! aeguill
12915 with the document preamble line
12916 \begin_inset Newline newline
12923 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12924 \begin_inset Newline newline
12929 will fix the guillemet problem.
12934 and that accented characters are not
12938 glyph, but built of
12942 characters, the accent and the letter.
12943 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12949 If you search for example for the French word
12950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12957 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12966 and not for the glyph
12967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12971 \begin_inset space ~
12975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12981 \begin_layout Itemize
12982 If you do not like the look of
12990 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12995 \begin_inset space ~
13001 \begin_inset space ~
13011 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13012 \begin_inset space ~
13015 serif and typewriter fonts,
13019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13020 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13027 \begin_inset space ~
13036 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13037 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13041 \begin_inset space \space{}
13049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13053 \begin_inset space \space{}
13059 \begin_inset space ~
13067 \begin_inset space ~
13077 but you can also select your own.
13078 \begin_inset Newline newline
13081 The differences between roman,
13084 \begin_inset space ~
13093 fonts are explained in section
13094 \begin_inset space ~
13098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13100 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13105 \begin_inset Newline newline
13111 \begin_inset space ~
13116 was originally designed for newspapers.
13117 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13118 into the small newspaper columns.
13122 \begin_inset space ~
13127 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13130 \begin_layout Standard
13131 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13144 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13149 depends on the class you are using.
13150 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13153 \begin_layout Standard
13154 Note that the font size is the
13159 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13160 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13161 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13162 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13165 \begin_inset space ~
13171 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13172 \begin_inset space ~
13176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13178 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13185 \begin_layout Standard
13189 \begin_inset space ~
13194 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13196 \begin_inset space ~
13199 serif or typewriter.
13204 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13214 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13217 \begin_layout Standard
13222 LaTeX font encoding
13224 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13225 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13231 \begin_inset Index idx
13234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13236 -packages ! fontenc
13242 \begin_inset space ~
13246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13248 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13253 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13254 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13261 \begin_layout Standard
13262 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13264 Use Old Style Figures
13268 Use True Small Caps
13271 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13274 Use Old Style Figures
13276 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13278 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13279 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13286 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13290 Use True Small Caps
13292 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13293 of scaled capitals.
13294 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13295 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13298 \begin_layout Standard
13303 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13304 a font to display the script characters.
13308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13309 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13315 \begin_inset Index idx
13318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13325 So this has no effect for the document language
13339 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13343 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13351 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13356 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13357 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13359 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13361 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13364 dialog, see section
13365 \begin_inset space ~
13369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13371 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13383 \begin_layout Subsection
13387 \begin_layout Standard
13388 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13389 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13391 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13392 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13393 choose a math font in the dialog
13395 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13399 \begin_inset Index idx
13402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13403 Document ! Settings
13409 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13410 automatically selects a math font.
13411 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13412 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13421 \begin_inset space ~
13427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13432 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13433 document font is available.
13436 \begin_layout Standard
13437 Note that the math font will not be used for
13441 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13447 or by the insertion of the command
13454 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13455 \begin_inset space ~
13459 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13460 while the math characters do not.
13462 \begin_inset space ~
13465 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13468 \begin_inset space ~
13476 \begin_inset space ~
13481 in the document font settings.
13484 \begin_layout Standard
13485 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13486 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13487 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13488 font (in most cases
13489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13495 \begin_inset space ~
13501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13504 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13505 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13513 \begin_inset space ~
13519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13525 \begin_layout Subsection
13526 Using Different Character Styles
13527 \begin_inset Index idx
13530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13537 \begin_inset Index idx
13540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13549 \begin_layout Standard
13550 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13551 automatically changes the character style for certain
13552 paragraph environments.
13554 supports two character styles,
13563 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13567 \begin_layout Standard
13572 style, do one of the following:
13575 \begin_layout Itemize
13576 click on the toolbar button
13585 \begin_layout Itemize
13586 use the key binding
13595 \begin_layout Standard
13596 These commands are all toggles.
13601 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13604 \begin_layout Standard
13605 One typically uses the
13609 style for proper names.
13611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13618 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13626 \begin_layout Standard
13627 A more widely used character style is the
13632 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13639 \begin_layout Itemize
13640 clicking on the toolbar button
13649 \begin_layout Itemize
13650 using the keybindings
13659 \begin_layout Standard
13664 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13666 use a different font.
13669 \begin_layout Standard
13670 We've been using the
13674 style all over the place in this document.
13675 Here's one more example:
13678 \begin_layout Quotation
13681 Do not overuse character styles!
13684 \begin_layout Standard
13685 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13686 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13687 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13688 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13692 \begin_layout Standard
13693 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13701 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13703 \begin_inset space ~
13706 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13712 arg "dialog-show character"
13718 \begin_layout Subsection
13719 Fine-Tuning with the
13724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13726 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13731 \begin_inset Index idx
13734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13743 \begin_layout Standard
13744 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13746 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13747 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13748 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13749 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13750 from ordinary dialog.
13753 \begin_layout Standard
13754 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13755 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13756 \begin_inset Newline newline
13759 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13760 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13763 \begin_layout Standard
13764 To use custom character styles, open the
13766 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13768 \begin_inset space ~
13771 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13774 dialog or press the toolbar button
13777 arg "dialog-show character"
13781 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13782 font property that you can choose.
13783 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13786 \begin_inset space ~
13791 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13796 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13797 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13798 environments all at once.
13801 \begin_layout Standard
13802 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13805 \begin_inset space ~
13817 \begin_layout Labeling
13818 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13832 The possible options are:
13836 \begin_layout Labeling
13837 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13842 This is the Roman font family.
13843 Normally a serif font.
13844 It's also the default family.
13854 \begin_layout Labeling
13855 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13859 \begin_inset space ~
13866 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13878 \begin_layout Labeling
13879 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13886 This is the Typewriter font family.
13892 arg "font-typewriter"
13901 \begin_layout Labeling
13902 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13907 This corresponds to the print weight.
13912 \begin_layout Labeling
13913 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13918 This is the Medium font series.
13919 It's also the default series.
13922 \begin_layout Labeling
13923 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13930 This is the Bold font series.
13943 \begin_layout Labeling
13944 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13949 As the name implies.
13954 \begin_layout Labeling
13955 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13960 This is the Upright font shape.
13961 It's also the default shape.
13964 \begin_layout Labeling
13965 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13979 s the Italic font shape
13985 \begin_layout Labeling
13986 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13993 This is the Slanted font shape
13995 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
13996 , this is different from italic).
13999 \begin_layout Labeling
14000 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14004 \begin_inset space ~
14011 This is the Small caps font shape
14018 \begin_layout Labeling
14019 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14024 Alters the text color.
14025 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14029 \begin_inset space ~
14034 , which means that the document default color set in
14036 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14037 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14043 \begin_inset space ~
14048 is used, you can choose between
14125 \begin_inset Index idx
14128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14137 \begin_layout Labeling
14138 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14143 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14144 the language of the document.
14145 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14146 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14148 \begin_inset Newline newline
14151 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14153 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14154 When using the spell checking (see section
14155 \begin_inset space ~
14159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14161 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14165 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14168 \begin_layout Labeling
14169 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14174 Alters the size of the font.
14175 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14176 proportional to the document font size.
14177 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14178 the details, but a general description of what
14184 \begin_layout Labeling
14185 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14206 arg "font-size tiny"
14212 \begin_layout Labeling
14213 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14234 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14240 \begin_layout Labeling
14241 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14262 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14268 \begin_layout Labeling
14269 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14290 arg "font-size small"
14296 \begin_layout Labeling
14297 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14311 It's also the default size.
14315 arg "font-size normal"
14321 \begin_layout Labeling
14322 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14343 arg "font-size large"
14349 \begin_layout Labeling
14350 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14371 arg "font-size larger"
14377 \begin_layout Labeling
14378 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14399 arg "font-size largest"
14405 \begin_layout Labeling
14406 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14427 arg "font-size huge"
14433 \begin_layout Labeling
14434 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14455 arg "font-size giant"
14461 \begin_layout Labeling
14462 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14467 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14487 arg "font-size increase"
14493 \begin_layout Labeling
14494 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14499 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14519 arg "font-size decrease"
14526 \begin_layout Standard
14531 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14532 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14534 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14535 — use those instead.
14536 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14539 \begin_layout Labeling
14540 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14545 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14550 \begin_layout Labeling
14551 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14558 This is text with emphasize on
14561 This might seem like the same as
14565 , but it is actually a bit different.
14571 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14573 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14576 \begin_layout Labeling
14577 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14584 This is text with Underbar on.
14590 arg "font-underline"
14596 \begin_inset Newline newline
14601 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14602 when you could not change fonts.
14603 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14604 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14605 because some people
14609 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14612 \begin_layout Labeling
14613 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14617 \begin_inset space ~
14624 This is text with Double underbar on.
14630 arg "font-underunderline"
14634 \begin_inset Newline newline
14637 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14638 about double underbar.
14641 \begin_layout Labeling
14642 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14646 \begin_inset space ~
14653 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14659 arg "font-underwave"
14663 \begin_inset Newline newline
14666 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14667 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14670 \begin_layout Labeling
14671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14678 This is text with Strikeout on.
14684 arg "font-strikeout"
14688 \begin_inset Newline newline
14691 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14692 changed in the meantime.
14695 \begin_layout Labeling
14696 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14703 This is text with Noun on.
14710 , this is a logical attribute.
14711 Normally it's equivalent to
14714 \begin_inset space ~
14723 \begin_layout Standard
14724 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14725 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14727 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14729 \begin_inset space ~
14732 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14738 arg "dialog-show character"
14741 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14742 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14745 arg "textstyle-apply"
14749 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14753 \begin_layout Standard
14754 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14761 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14762 (suppose you just set the shape to
14763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14781 \begin_inset space ~
14793 \begin_layout Standard
14794 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14802 \begin_inset space ~
14814 \begin_layout Itemize
14820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14827 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14845 \begin_inset Newline newline
14849 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14863 \begin_inset Note Note
14866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14867 For more on phantoms see section
14868 \begin_inset space ~
14872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14874 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14884 \begin_inset Newline newline
14890 \begin_layout Itemize
14895 fonts use characters with serifs.
14896 These are the small
14897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14904 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14905 The following example shows the difference:
14906 \begin_inset Newline newline
14910 \begin_inset Newline newline
14915 text without serifs
14918 \begin_inset Newline newline
14921 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14922 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14929 \begin_layout Itemize
14934 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14935 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14936 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14939 \begin_layout Standard
14940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14947 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14948 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14951 \begin_inset space ~
14956 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14957 the property to be removed.
14958 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14959 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14960 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14978 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14979 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14987 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14991 \begin_inset space ~
14996 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15007 If you, for example, set
15008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15026 \begin_inset space ~
15031 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15040 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15043 \begin_layout Standard
15044 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15045 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15048 \begin_layout Section
15049 Printing and Previewing
15052 \begin_layout Subsection
15056 \begin_layout Standard
15057 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15058 using \SpecialChar LyX
15059 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15060 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15061 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15062 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15064 Additional Features
15069 \begin_layout Standard
15071 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15074 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15075 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15076 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15079 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15080 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15081 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15082 to turn your writing into printable output.
15083 This happens in two stages:
15086 \begin_layout Enumerate
15087 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15088 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15090 a file with the extension,
15091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15105 \begin_layout Enumerate
15106 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15107 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15108 to use the commands in the
15112 file to produce printable output.
15115 \begin_layout Subsection
15116 Output file formats
15117 \begin_inset Index idx
15120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15129 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15136 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15137 Simple text (ASCII)
15138 \begin_inset Index idx
15141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15142 File formats ! ASCII
15150 \begin_layout Standard
15151 This file type has the extension
15152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15164 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15168 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15175 \begin_layout Standard
15176 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15178 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15179 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15181 \begin_inset space ~
15187 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15188 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15189 bibliography (section
15190 \begin_inset space ~
15194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15196 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15201 If your document includes such material, use
15203 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15204 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15206 \begin_inset space ~
15210 \begin_inset space ~
15214 \begin_inset space ~
15222 \begin_inset space ~
15226 \begin_inset space ~
15232 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15233 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15236 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15239 \begin_inset Index idx
15242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15243 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15252 \begin_layout Standard
15253 This file type has the extension
15254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15265 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15268 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15269 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15270 -Errors or to process it manually
15271 with console commands.
15272 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15273 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15274 's temporary directory whenever you
15275 view or export your document.
15278 \begin_layout Standard
15279 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15280 -file using the menu
15282 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15283 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15287 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15288 export variants are explained in section
15289 \begin_inset space ~
15293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15295 reference "subsec:Export"
15302 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15304 \begin_inset Index idx
15307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15316 \begin_layout Standard
15317 This file type has the extension
15318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15338 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15339 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15340 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15344 \begin_layout Standard
15345 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15346 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15347 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15348 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15349 when you view the DVI.
15350 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15353 \begin_layout Standard
15354 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15356 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15357 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15362 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15363 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15365 \begin_inset space ~
15371 The latter option uses the program
15373 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15379 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15382 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15383 font access (see section
15384 \begin_inset space ~
15388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15390 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15395 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15396 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15401 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15403 \begin_inset Index idx
15406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15407 File formats ! PostScript
15415 \begin_layout Standard
15416 This file type has the extension
15417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15429 PostScript was developed by the company
15433 as a printer language.
15434 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15436 PostScript can be seen as a
15437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15440 programming language
15441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15444 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15449 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15456 \begin_inset Index idx
15459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15461 -packages ! pstricks
15471 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15474 \begin_layout Standard
15475 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15479 Encapsulated PostScript
15480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15483 (EPS, file extension
15484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15496 As \SpecialChar LyX
15497 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15498 convert them in the background to EPS.
15499 If, for example, you have 50
15500 \begin_inset space ~
15503 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15505 \begin_inset space ~
15508 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15509 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15511 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15512 EPS to avoid this problem.
15515 \begin_layout Standard
15516 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15518 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15519 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15525 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15527 \begin_inset Index idx
15530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15537 \begin_inset Index idx
15540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15549 \begin_layout Standard
15550 This file type has the extension
15551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15567 Portable Document Format
15568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15575 was derived from PostScript.
15576 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15585 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15586 looks exactly the same.
15589 \begin_layout Standard
15590 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15594 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15598 (JPG, file extension
15599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15626 Portable Network Graphics
15627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15630 (PNG, file extension
15631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15643 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15644 converts them in the
15645 background to one of these formats.
15646 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15647 will slow down your workflow.
15648 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15651 \begin_layout Standard
15652 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15654 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15660 \begin_layout Description
15662 \begin_inset space ~
15665 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15669 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15672 \begin_layout Description
15674 \begin_inset space ~
15681 ) This uses the program
15683 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15686 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15689 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15692 is a new engine, derived from
15696 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15697 access (see section
15698 \begin_inset space ~
15702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15704 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15709 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15710 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15715 \begin_layout Description
15717 \begin_inset space ~
15724 ) This uses the program
15729 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15735 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15736 font access (see section
15737 \begin_inset space ~
15741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15743 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15748 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15749 vertically written Japanese.
15752 \begin_layout Description
15754 \begin_inset space ~
15757 (cropped) This is the same as
15760 \begin_inset space ~
15765 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15766 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15767 to generate good-looking
15768 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15771 \begin_layout Description
15773 \begin_inset space ~
15776 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15780 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15784 \begin_layout Description
15786 \begin_inset space ~
15789 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15793 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15794 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15798 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15799 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15802 \begin_layout Standard
15806 \begin_inset space ~
15815 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15816 works without problems.
15817 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15818 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15822 \begin_inset space ~
15830 \begin_inset space ~
15835 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15843 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15845 \begin_inset Index idx
15848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15849 FileFormats ! XHTML
15855 \begin_inset Index idx
15858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15867 \begin_layout Standard
15868 This file type has the extension
15869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15881 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15882 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15883 When \SpecialChar LyX
15884 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15885 suitable for the purpose.
15886 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15888 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15889 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15892 between different formats, which are described in section
15894 Math Output in XHTML
15899 \begin_inset space ~
15907 \begin_layout Standard
15908 XHTML output remains
15909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15916 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15917 features are supported yet.
15921 and the World Wide Web
15925 Additional Features
15927 manual, for more information.
15930 \begin_layout Standard
15931 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15933 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15934 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15940 \begin_layout Subsection
15942 \begin_inset Index idx
15945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15954 \begin_layout Standard
15955 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15956 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15965 or use the toolbar button
15972 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15973 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15980 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15984 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15992 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15997 Further output formats can be selected via
15999 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16000 View (Other Formats)
16002 or the toolbar button
16011 \begin_layout Standard
16012 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16013 viewer window using the menu
16015 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16020 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16021 Update (Other Formats)
16026 \begin_layout Standard
16027 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16030 To have a real output, export your document.
16033 \begin_layout Section
16034 A few Words about Typography
16035 \begin_inset Index idx
16038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16047 \begin_layout Subsection
16048 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16049 \begin_inset Index idx
16052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16059 \begin_inset Index idx
16062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16071 \begin_layout Standard
16072 In \SpecialChar LyX
16074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16085 character comes in four lengths: the
16097 , and the minus sign:
16098 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16104 \begin_layout Standard
16105 \begin_inset Tabular
16106 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16107 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16108 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16109 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16110 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16111 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16140 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16180 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16205 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16207 \begin_inset space ~
16210 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16217 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16242 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16244 \begin_inset space ~
16247 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16268 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16302 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16308 \begin_layout Standard
16309 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16321 character multiple times in a row.
16322 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16323 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16346 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16356 \begin_layout Standard
16357 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16358 math mode and has a length of its own.
16359 Here are some examples:
16362 \begin_layout Enumerate
16363 line- and page-breaks
16364 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16374 \begin_layout Enumerate
16376 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16386 \begin_layout Enumerate
16387 Oh — there's a dash.
16388 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16398 \begin_layout Enumerate
16399 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16403 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16413 \begin_layout Subsection
16415 \begin_inset Index idx
16418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16427 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16434 \begin_layout Standard
16435 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16436 but automatically in the output.
16437 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16443 \begin_inset Index idx
16446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16453 following the rules of the document language.
16456 \begin_layout Standard
16458 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16462 font and with unusual constructs, like
16463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16471 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16472 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16473 This is done with the menu
16475 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16476 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16478 \begin_inset space ~
16484 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16486 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16490 \begin_layout Standard
16491 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16492 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16503 would then see the hyphen
16504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16511 as a hyphenation possibility.
16512 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16513 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16514 as described in section
16515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16518 Prevent Hyphenation
16519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16525 \begin_inset space ~
16533 \begin_layout Subsection
16535 \begin_inset Index idx
16538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16547 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16548 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16551 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16558 \begin_layout Standard
16559 When \SpecialChar LyX
16560 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16561 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16563 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16569 appropriate amount of space.
16570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16573 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16575 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16576 gets after another word.
16579 \begin_layout Standard
16580 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16581 not work in all cases.
16583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16594 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16595 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16598 \begin_layout Standard
16599 Here are some examples of
16603 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16606 \begin_layout Itemize
16611 \begin_layout Itemize
16616 \begin_layout Standard
16617 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16620 \begin_layout Itemize
16622 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16626 this is too much space!
16629 \begin_layout Itemize
16634 \begin_layout Standard
16635 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16638 \begin_layout Standard
16639 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16642 \begin_layout Enumerate
16646 \begin_inset space ~
16651 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16652 \begin_inset space ~
16656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16658 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16663 \begin_inset Index idx
16666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16667 Spaces ! inter-word
16675 \begin_layout Enumerate
16679 \begin_inset space ~
16684 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16685 \begin_inset space ~
16689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16691 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16696 \begin_inset Index idx
16699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16708 \begin_layout Enumerate
16712 \begin_inset space ~
16716 \begin_inset space ~
16720 \begin_inset space ~
16727 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16729 \begin_inset space ~
16734 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16735 This function is also bound to
16738 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16744 \begin_layout Standard
16745 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16748 \begin_layout Itemize
16750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16754 \begin_inset space \space{}
16757 this is too much space!
16760 \begin_layout Itemize
16761 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16765 \begin_layout Standard
16766 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16767 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16769 will take care of this.
16772 \begin_layout Standard
16773 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16777 \begin_inset space ~
16783 feature described in the section
16785 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16790 Additional Features
16795 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16797 \begin_inset Index idx
16800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16801 Typography ! Quotes
16807 \begin_inset Index idx
16810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16841 \begin_layout Standard
16843 usually sets quotes correctly.
16844 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16845 and use a closing quote at the end.
16847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16855 The keyboard character,
16859 , generates this automatically.
16862 \begin_layout Standard
16863 You can specify what character the
16867 key produces using the submenu
16873 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16877 \begin_inset Index idx
16880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16881 Document ! Settings
16891 There are six choices:
16894 \begin_layout Labeling
16895 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16918 \begin_layout Labeling
16919 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16922 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16926 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16932 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16936 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16942 \begin_layout Labeling
16943 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16946 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16950 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16956 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16960 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16966 \begin_layout Labeling
16967 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16970 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16974 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16980 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16984 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16990 \begin_layout Labeling
16991 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16994 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16998 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17004 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17008 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17014 \begin_layout Labeling
17015 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17018 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17022 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17028 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17032 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17038 \begin_layout Standard
17039 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17042 arg "quote-insert single"
17048 \begin_layout Subsection
17050 \begin_inset Index idx
17053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17054 Typography ! Ligatures
17060 \begin_inset Index idx
17063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17094 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17101 \begin_layout Standard
17102 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17103 print them as single characters.
17104 These groups are known as
17109 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17110 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17112 Here are the standard ligatures:
17115 \begin_layout Itemize
17119 \begin_layout Itemize
17123 \begin_layout Itemize
17127 \begin_layout Itemize
17131 \begin_layout Itemize
17135 \begin_layout Standard
17136 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17139 \begin_layout Standard
17140 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17141 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17149 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17165 To break a ligature, use
17167 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17168 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17170 \begin_inset space ~
17177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17188 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17205 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17213 \begin_layout Subsection
17215 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17217 \begin_inset Index idx
17220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17230 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17237 \begin_layout Standard
17240 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17241 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
17245 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17248 \begin_layout Description
17250 The name of the game.
17253 \begin_layout Description
17255 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17259 \begin_layout Description
17261 The \SpecialChar TeX
17262 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
17266 \begin_layout Description
17267 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17268 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17272 \begin_layout Standard
17273 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17279 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17287 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17288 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17289 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17290 converges to the number
17291 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17294 : The actual version is
17295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17303 , the previous one was
17304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17315 \begin_layout Subsection
17317 \begin_inset Index idx
17320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17329 \begin_layout Standard
17330 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17331 space between two words.
17332 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17342 for units use the menu
17344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17345 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17347 \begin_inset space ~
17355 arg "space-insert thin"
17361 \begin_layout Standard
17362 Here is an example to show the differences:
17365 \begin_layout Standard
17366 \begin_inset Tabular
17367 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17368 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17369 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17370 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17377 \begin_inset space ~
17381 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17393 space between number and unit
17400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17409 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17421 half space between number and unit
17434 \begin_layout Subsection
17436 \begin_inset Index idx
17439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17440 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17448 \begin_layout Standard
17449 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17451 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17452 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17453 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17454 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17455 These bits of text became known as
17466 \begin_layout Standard
17467 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17468 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17469 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17470 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17471 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17472 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17473 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17474 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17475 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17476 \begin_inset Newline newline
17484 \begin_inset Newline newline
17492 \begin_inset Newline newline
17495 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17496 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17497 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17499 \begin_inset space ~
17503 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17505 key "latexcompanion"
17510 \begin_inset space ~
17514 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17520 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17521 's page break mechanism.
17524 \begin_layout Chapter
17525 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17526 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17528 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17535 \begin_layout Standard
17536 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17539 \begin_inset space ~
17545 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17548 \begin_layout Section
17550 \begin_inset Index idx
17553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17560 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17569 \begin_layout Standard
17571 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17574 \begin_layout Description
17577 \begin_inset space ~
17580 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17581 \begin_inset Newline newline
17585 \begin_inset Note Note
17588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17589 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17597 \begin_layout Description
17598 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17599 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17600 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17603 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17604 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17606 \begin_inset space ~
17612 \begin_inset Newline newline
17616 \begin_inset Note Comment
17619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17620 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17629 \begin_layout Description
17631 \begin_inset space ~
17634 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17635 set in the document settings under
17637 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17639 \begin_inset space ~
17645 \begin_inset Newline newline
17649 \begin_inset Newline newline
17653 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17662 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17663 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17668 of a comment that appears in the output.
17674 \begin_inset Newline newline
17678 \begin_inset Newline newline
17681 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17684 \begin_layout Standard
17685 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17693 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17697 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17700 \begin_layout Section
17702 \begin_inset Index idx
17705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17712 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17714 name "sec:Footnotes"
17721 \begin_layout Standard
17723 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17726 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17729 or the toolbar button
17732 arg "footnote-insert"
17744 \begin_inset Graphics
17745 filename clipart/footnote.png
17754 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17755 's representation of your footnote.
17765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17784 label, the box will
17788 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17789 Clicking on the box label again will close
17802 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17803 and click on the footnote
17818 \begin_layout Standard
17819 Here is an example footnote:
17827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17828 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17836 \begin_layout Standard
17837 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17838 position where the footnote box is placed.
17839 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17840 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17841 according to the document class.
17843 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17844 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17850 ey are described in the
17853 \begin_inset space ~
17861 \begin_layout Section
17863 \begin_inset Index idx
17866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17875 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17882 \begin_layout Standard
17883 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
17885 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17887 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17889 \begin_inset space ~
17894 or the toolbar button
17897 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17923 appearing within your text.
17924 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17925 's representation of your margin
17934 \begin_layout Standard
17935 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17939 \begin_inset Marginal
17942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17944 This is a marginal note.
17952 \begin_layout Standard
17953 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17954 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17955 pages, right on odd pages.
17958 \begin_layout Standard
17959 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17962 \begin_inset space ~
17970 \begin_inset space ~
17978 \begin_layout Section
17979 Graphics and Images
17980 \begin_inset Index idx
17983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17990 \begin_inset Index idx
17993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18000 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18002 name "sec:Graphics"
18009 \begin_layout Standard
18010 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18011 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18014 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18019 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18023 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18026 \begin_layout Standard
18027 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18032 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18033 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18035 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18036 \begin_inset space ~
18040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18042 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18049 \begin_layout Standard
18054 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18055 of the image in the output.
18056 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18060 \begin_inset space ~
18064 \begin_inset space ~
18073 \begin_inset space ~
18077 \begin_inset space ~
18081 \begin_inset space ~
18086 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18087 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18095 \begin_layout Standard
18099 \begin_inset space ~
18103 \begin_inset space ~
18108 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18109 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18111 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18116 \begin_inset space ~
18121 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18122 with the image size is printed.
18125 \begin_layout Standard
18126 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18127 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18129 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18132 \begin_layout Standard
18134 \begin_inset Graphics
18135 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18143 \begin_layout Standard
18144 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18145 the image into a float, see section
18146 \begin_inset space ~
18150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18152 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18159 \begin_layout Subsection
18161 \begin_inset Index idx
18164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18173 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18180 \begin_layout Standard
18181 You can insert images in any known file format.
18182 But as we explained in section
18183 \begin_inset space ~
18187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18189 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18193 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18195 therefore uses the program
18199 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18200 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18201 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18202 \begin_inset space ~
18206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18208 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18215 \begin_layout Standard
18216 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18219 \begin_layout Description
18221 \begin_inset space ~
18224 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18225 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18226 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18230 Graphics Interchange Format
18231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18234 (GIF, file extension
18235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18247 \begin_inset Index idx
18250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18282 Portable Network Graphics
18283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18286 (PNG, file extension
18287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18299 \begin_inset Index idx
18302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18334 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18338 (JPG, file extension
18339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18363 \begin_inset Index idx
18366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18397 \begin_layout Description
18399 \begin_inset space ~
18402 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18404 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18405 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18406 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18407 \begin_inset Newline newline
18410 Scalable image formats can be
18411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18414 Scalable Vector Graphics
18415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18418 (SVG, file extension
18419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18431 \begin_inset Index idx
18434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18466 Encapsulated PostScript
18467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18470 (EPS, file extension
18471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18483 \begin_inset Index idx
18486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18518 Portable Document Format
18519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18522 (PDF, file extension
18523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18535 \begin_inset Index idx
18538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18553 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18554 result will not be scalable.
18555 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18561 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18569 \begin_layout Standard
18570 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18577 \begin_layout Subsection
18578 Grouping of Image Settings
18579 \begin_inset Index idx
18582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18583 Images ! Settings grouping
18591 \begin_layout Standard
18592 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18594 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18595 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18597 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18598 need to manually change each of them.
18602 \begin_layout Standard
18603 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18606 \begin_inset space ~
18610 \begin_inset space ~
18622 \begin_inset space ~
18626 \begin_inset space ~
18632 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18633 and checking the name of the desired group.
18636 \begin_layout Section
18638 \begin_inset Index idx
18641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18657 \begin_layout Standard
18658 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18661 arg "tabular-insert"
18666 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18670 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18671 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18672 from the rest of the table.
18673 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18674 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18676 Here is an example table:
18679 \begin_layout Standard
18681 \begin_inset Tabular
18682 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18683 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18684 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18685 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18686 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18687 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18887 \begin_layout Subsection
18891 \begin_layout Standard
18892 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18895 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
18899 This brings up the table dialog.
18900 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18901 cursor is placed currently.
18902 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18903 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18904 done on all of your selection.
18907 \begin_layout Standard
18908 In addition to the table dialog, the
18911 \begin_inset space ~
18916 helps you in setting table properties.
18917 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18920 \begin_layout Standard
18924 \begin_inset space ~
18929 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18930 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18931 current cell respectively.
18932 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18934 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18935 of text, see section
18936 \begin_inset space ~
18940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18942 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
18949 \begin_layout Standard
18950 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18951 using the check box
18960 This will merge the cells to
18964 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18965 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18966 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18967 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18968 in the last row without the upper border:
18971 \begin_layout Standard
18973 \begin_inset Tabular
18974 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18975 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18976 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18977 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18978 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18979 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18990 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18999 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19075 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19110 \begin_layout Standard
19111 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19112 -arguments for the table.
19113 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19114 explained in the chapter
19121 \begin_inset space ~
19127 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19128 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19129 but are visible in the output.
19132 \begin_layout Standard
19133 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19141 Most DVI-viewers are
19145 able to display rotations.
19153 \begin_layout Standard
19158 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19163 adds lines for all cell borders.
19166 \begin_layout Subsection
19168 \begin_inset Index idx
19171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19172 Tables ! Longtables
19178 \begin_inset Index idx
19181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19190 \begin_layout Standard
19191 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19194 \begin_inset space ~
19198 \begin_inset space ~
19207 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19208 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19211 \begin_layout Description
19216 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19217 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19218 except for the first page, if
19221 \begin_inset space ~
19229 \begin_layout Description
19233 \begin_inset space ~
19238 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19239 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19242 \begin_layout Description
19247 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19248 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19249 except for the last page, if
19252 \begin_inset space ~
19260 \begin_layout Description
19264 \begin_inset space ~
19269 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19270 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19273 \begin_layout Description
19274 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19275 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19277 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19281 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19284 \begin_inset space ~
19292 \begin_layout Standard
19293 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19294 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19295 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19301 In this context, first means first in this order:
19304 \begin_inset space ~
19316 \begin_inset space ~
19321 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19324 \begin_layout Standard
19326 \begin_inset Tabular
19327 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19328 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19329 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19330 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19331 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19332 <row endfirsthead="true">
19333 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19339 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19344 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19353 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19363 <row endfirsthead="true">
19364 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19375 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19384 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19396 <row endhead="true">
19397 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19408 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19417 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19427 <row endhead="true">
19428 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19439 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19448 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19460 <row endfoot="true">
19461 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19472 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19481 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19512 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20453 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20462 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20471 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20482 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20513 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20544 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20575 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20606 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20637 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20668 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20699 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20730 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20761 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20792 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20823 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20854 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20885 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20916 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20947 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20978 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21009 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21040 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21071 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21102 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21133 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21164 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21195 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21226 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21257 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21288 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21319 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21350 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21381 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21412 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21442 <row endlastfoot="true">
21443 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21454 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21463 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21480 \begin_layout Subsection
21482 \begin_inset Index idx
21485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21494 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21501 \begin_layout Standard
21502 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21503 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21504 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21505 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21509 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21512 \begin_layout Standard
21513 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21514 for the column in the table dialog.
21515 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21516 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21520 \begin_layout Standard
21522 \begin_inset Tabular
21523 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21524 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21525 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21526 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21527 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21547 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21616 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21672 This is longer now.
21677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21728 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21729 This is longer now.
21734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21760 \begin_layout Standard
21761 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21762 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21767 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21768 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21774 Selection with the mouse or with
21778 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21779 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21780 the selection from outside the table.
21783 \begin_layout Section
21785 \begin_inset Index idx
21788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21795 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21804 \begin_layout Subsection
21808 \begin_layout Standard
21809 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21810 have a fixed location.
21812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21819 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21827 \begin_inset space ~
21832 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21833 too many notes on the current page.
21836 \begin_layout Standard
21837 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21838 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21839 and pages without text.
21840 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21841 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21842 Floats are therefore numbered.
21843 Referencing is described in section
21844 \begin_inset space ~
21848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21850 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21857 \begin_layout Standard
21858 To insert a float, use the menu
21860 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21864 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21865 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21867 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21868 \begin_inset Index idx
21871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21877 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21878 paragraph within the float.
21879 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21880 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21881 left-clicking on the box label.
21882 A closed float box looks like this:
21883 \begin_inset Graphics
21884 filename clipart/float.png
21889 – a gray button with a red label.
21892 \begin_layout Standard
21893 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
21895 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21898 \begin_layout Subsection
21900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21902 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21907 \begin_inset Index idx
21910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21911 Floats ! Figure floats
21919 \begin_layout Standard
21921 \begin_inset space ~
21925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21927 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21931 was created using the menu
21933 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21934 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21940 arg "float-insert figure"
21944 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21947 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21953 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21957 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21958 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21960 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
21962 \begin_inset space ~
21970 arg "layout-paragraph"
21976 \begin_layout Standard
21977 \begin_inset Float figure
21982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21984 \begin_inset Graphics
21985 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21995 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21998 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22000 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22004 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22017 \begin_layout Standard
22018 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22019 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22021 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22030 ) and refer to it using the menu
22032 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22038 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22042 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22043 vague references like
22044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22051 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22052 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22062 For more about cross-references, see section
22063 \begin_inset space ~
22067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22069 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22076 \begin_layout Standard
22077 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22078 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22079 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22080 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22081 as described in section
22082 \begin_inset space ~
22086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22088 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22094 \begin_inset space ~
22098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22100 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22104 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22105 You can also set the images one below the other.
22107 \begin_inset space ~
22111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22113 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22120 reference "fig:Platypus"
22124 are the subfigures.
22127 \begin_layout Standard
22128 \begin_inset Float figure
22133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22134 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22138 \begin_inset Float figure
22143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22144 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22147 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22149 name "fig:Undefinable"
22161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22162 \begin_inset Graphics
22163 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22174 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22178 \begin_inset Float figure
22183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22184 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22189 name "fig:Platypus"
22201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22202 \begin_inset Graphics
22203 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22215 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22222 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22227 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22231 Two distorted images.
22244 \begin_layout Subsection
22246 \begin_inset Index idx
22249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22250 Floats ! Table floats
22258 \begin_layout Standard
22259 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22262 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22265 or the toolbar button
22268 arg "float-insert table"
22272 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22273 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22274 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22276 \begin_inset space ~
22280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22282 reference "tab:Table-float"
22289 \begin_layout Standard
22290 \begin_inset Float table
22295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22296 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22299 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22301 name "tab:Table-float"
22313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22315 \begin_inset Tabular
22316 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22317 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22318 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22319 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22320 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22447 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22468 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22471 \end{array}\right]$
22479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22492 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22513 \begin_layout Subsection
22515 \begin_inset Index idx
22518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22527 \begin_layout Standard
22529 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22530 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22531 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22533 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22541 \begin_inset space ~
22549 \begin_layout Section
22551 \begin_inset Index idx
22554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22563 \begin_layout Standard
22565 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22567 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22568 \begin_inset space \space{}
22575 \begin_layout Standard
22576 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22577 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22579 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22583 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22584 and its alignment within the page.
22587 \begin_layout Standard
22589 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22599 height_special "totalheight"
22604 backgroundcolor "none"
22607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22610 This is a minipage.
22611 The text is set in an italic style.
22614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22617 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22618 another formatting.
22626 \begin_layout Standard
22627 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22630 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22634 as described in section
22635 \begin_inset space ~
22639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22641 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22646 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22652 \begin_layout Standard
22653 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22663 height_special "totalheight"
22668 backgroundcolor "none"
22671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22672 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22673 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22679 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22683 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22693 height_special "totalheight"
22698 backgroundcolor "none"
22701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22702 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22703 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22711 \begin_layout Standard
22712 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22718 \begin_layout Standard
22719 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22721 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22728 \begin_inset space ~
22736 \begin_layout Chapter
22737 Mathematical Formulas
22738 \begin_inset Index idx
22741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22748 \begin_inset Index idx
22751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22782 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22789 \begin_layout Standard
22790 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22795 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22798 \begin_layout Section
22800 \begin_inset Index idx
22803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22812 \begin_layout Standard
22813 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22826 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22828 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22829 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22830 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22832 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22838 \begin_layout Standard
22839 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22843 \begin_inset space ~
22848 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22851 \begin_layout Standard
22852 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22853 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22856 \begin_layout Standard
22857 This is a line with an inline formula
22858 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22864 \begin_layout Standard
22865 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22866 paragraph, like this one:
22867 \begin_inset Formula
22874 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22877 \begin_layout Standard
22879 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22881 For example, typing
22882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22895 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22896 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22900 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22903 \begin_inset space ~
22911 \begin_layout Subsection
22912 Navigating in Formulas
22913 \begin_inset Index idx
22916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22925 \begin_layout Standard
22926 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22927 achieved with the arrow keys.
22929 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22930 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22935 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22936 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22940 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22944 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22947 \end{array}\right]$
22955 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22960 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22961 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22964 \begin_layout Standard
22969 , printed in this document as
22970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22974 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22981 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22982 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22983 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22988 For example, if you want
22989 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22997 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23007 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23011 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23016 , since in the latter case only the
23019 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23024 will be under the square root sign:
23025 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23031 \begin_layout Standard
23032 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23034 \begin_inset Formula
23036 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23045 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23046 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23049 \begin_layout Subsection
23053 \begin_layout Standard
23054 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23055 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23059 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23060 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23061 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23062 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23063 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23067 \begin_layout Subsection
23068 Exponents and Subscripts
23069 \begin_inset Index idx
23072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23079 \begin_inset Index idx
23082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23091 \begin_layout Standard
23092 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23095 arg "math-superscript"
23101 arg "math-subscript"
23104 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23106 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23109 , type in a formula
23112 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23122 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23128 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23132 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23138 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23144 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23153 , you have to use an extra
23157 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23158 For example, if you want
23159 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23165 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23171 Subscripts are similar: To get
23172 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23178 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23186 \begin_layout Subsection
23188 \begin_inset Index idx
23191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23200 \begin_layout Standard
23201 Create a fraction either with the command
23207 or by using the icon
23210 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23216 \begin_inset space ~
23222 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23223 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23224 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23229 To move back up, press
23234 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23235 \begin_inset Formula
23237 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23240 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23248 \begin_layout Subsection
23250 \begin_inset Index idx
23253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23262 \begin_layout Standard
23263 Roots can be created using the
23266 \begin_inset space ~
23274 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23280 arg "math-insert \\root"
23302 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23308 always produces a square root.
23311 \begin_layout Subsection
23312 Operators with Limits
23313 \begin_inset Index idx
23316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23323 \begin_inset Index idx
23326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23335 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23342 \begin_layout Standard
23344 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23348 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23351 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23352 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23353 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23354 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23355 The sum operator will automatically place its
23356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23363 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23365 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23369 \begin_inset Formula
23371 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23376 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23380 \begin_layout Standard
23381 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23383 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23384 behind the operator and using the menu
23386 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23387 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23389 \begin_inset space ~
23393 \begin_inset space ~
23407 \begin_layout Standard
23408 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23417 \begin_inset Index idx
23420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23427 \begin_inset Formula
23429 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23434 which will place the
23435 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23447 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23448 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23454 \begin_layout Standard
23455 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23462 Have a look at section
23463 \begin_inset space ~
23467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23469 reference "subsec:Functions"
23473 for an explanation of function macros.
23476 \begin_layout Subsection
23478 \begin_inset Index idx
23481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23490 \begin_layout Standard
23491 Most math symbols can be found in the
23494 \begin_inset space ~
23499 under one of several categories; including
23516 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23520 \begin_layout Standard
23521 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23522 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23523 don't have to use the
23526 \begin_inset space ~
23531 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23533 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23536 \begin_layout Subsection
23538 \begin_inset Index idx
23541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23550 \begin_layout Standard
23551 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23557 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23563 \begin_inset space ~
23571 arg "math-insert \\space"
23575 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23576 For example, the sequence
23581 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23584 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23586 \begin_inset Graphics
23587 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23592 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23593 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23594 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23595 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23596 , because they are negative
23598 Here are two examples:
23601 \begin_layout Standard
23611 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23617 \begin_layout Standard
23627 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23633 \begin_layout Subsection
23635 \begin_inset Index idx
23638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23647 name "subsec:Functions"
23654 \begin_layout Standard
23658 \begin_inset space ~
23663 contains under the button
23666 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23669 a number of function macros, such as
23670 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23674 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23682 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23689 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23690 avoid confusions, because
23691 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23695 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23701 \begin_layout Standard
23702 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23704 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23708 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23714 \begin_layout Standard
23715 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23716 are placed, as described in section
23717 \begin_inset space ~
23721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23723 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23730 \begin_layout Subsection
23732 \begin_inset Index idx
23735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23744 \begin_layout Standard
23745 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23747 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23748 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23749 commands, for example, to enter
23750 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23753 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23754 Our example is entered by typing
23759 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23766 \begin_inset space ~
23770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23772 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23776 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23779 \begin_layout Standard
23780 \begin_inset Float table
23785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23786 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23791 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23795 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23805 \begin_inset Tabular
23806 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23807 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23808 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23809 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23810 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23894 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23948 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24002 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24056 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24110 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24164 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24218 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24272 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24326 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24371 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24392 \begin_layout Standard
24393 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24396 \begin_inset space ~
24404 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24407 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24411 \begin_layout Section
24412 Brackets and Delimiters
24413 \begin_inset Index idx
24416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24423 \begin_inset Index idx
24426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24435 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24442 \begin_layout Standard
24443 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24445 For some purposes, using just the keys
24450 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24451 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24452 toolbar delimiter icon
24455 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24459 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24460 \begin_inset Formula
24462 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24470 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24471 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24475 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24478 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24484 \begin_inset Formula
24486 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24494 \begin_layout Standard
24495 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24496 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24500 \begin_layout Standard
24501 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24502 left side and right side.
24503 If you use the option
24506 \begin_inset space ~
24511 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24512 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24514 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24519 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24520 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24523 \begin_layout Standard
24524 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24525 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24526 is to go inside the brackets.
24527 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24532 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24533 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24534 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24538 arg "math-delim ( )"
24544 \begin_layout Section
24545 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24546 \begin_inset Index idx
24549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24556 \begin_inset Index idx
24559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24566 \begin_inset Index idx
24569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24570 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24578 \begin_layout Standard
24579 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24583 \begin_inset space ~
24591 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24595 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24596 Here is an example:
24597 \begin_inset Formula
24599 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24608 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24609 \begin_inset space ~
24613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24615 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24620 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24621 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24622 This alignment is set in the box
24627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24676 for every column as default.
24677 For example, the sequence
24678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24689 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24690 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24691 corresponds to the relevant column.
24692 The result will look like this:
24693 \begin_inset Formula
24696 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24697 column & has & has\,right\\
24698 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24707 \begin_layout Standard
24708 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24711 arg "newline-insert newline"
24714 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24715 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24717 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24720 or the math toolbar.
24723 \begin_layout Standard
24724 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24725 It can be created with the menu
24727 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24728 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24730 \begin_inset space ~
24742 Here is an example:
24743 \begin_inset Formula
24757 \begin_layout Standard
24758 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24761 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24764 arg "newline-insert newline"
24768 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24773 arg "newline-insert newline"
24776 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24784 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24785 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24786 A new row is created by every further entry of
24789 arg "newline-insert newline"
24793 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24794 Here is an example:
24795 \begin_inset Formula
24797 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24798 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24803 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24804 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24805 \begin_inset Formula
24807 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24815 \begin_layout Standard
24816 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24823 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24824 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24827 reference "eq:asquared"
24832 The other types are described in section
24833 \begin_inset space ~
24837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24839 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24846 \begin_layout Section
24847 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24848 \begin_inset Index idx
24851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24852 Math ! Formula numbering
24858 \begin_inset Index idx
24861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24862 Math ! Referencing formulas
24868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24870 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24877 \begin_layout Standard
24878 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24880 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24881 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24883 \begin_inset space ~
24887 \begin_inset space ~
24895 arg "math-number-toggle"
24899 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24900 within parentheses.
24901 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24902 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24903 the document class.
24904 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24905 separated by a dot:
24906 \begin_inset Formula
24916 arg "math-number-toggle"
24919 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24920 You can only number displayed formulas.
24923 \begin_layout Standard
24924 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24926 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24927 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24929 \begin_inset space ~
24933 \begin_inset space ~
24941 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24944 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24945 \begin_inset Formula
24948 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24954 To number all lines use the shortcut
24957 arg "math-number-toggle"
24963 \begin_layout Standard
24964 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24967 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24968 A label is inserted with the menu
24970 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24979 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24980 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24981 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24993 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24994 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24995 We inserted in the following example the label
24996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25003 in the second line:
25004 \begin_inset Formula
25006 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25007 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25012 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25013 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25014 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25016 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25018 \begin_inset space ~
25026 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25030 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25031 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25032 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25033 as the formula number:
25036 \begin_layout Standard
25037 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25040 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25047 \begin_layout Standard
25048 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25049 's cross-reference box are described in section
25050 \begin_inset space ~
25054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25056 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25061 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25069 \begin_layout Section
25070 User defined math macros
25071 \begin_inset Index idx
25074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25083 \begin_layout Standard
25085 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25086 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25087 Math macros are explained in section
25090 \begin_inset space ~
25102 \begin_layout Section
25106 \begin_layout Subsection
25108 \begin_inset Index idx
25111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25120 \begin_layout Standard
25121 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25122 To set a font in a formula, use the
25125 \begin_inset space ~
25133 arg "math-insert \\font"
25136 , or enter its command, listed in table
25137 \begin_inset space ~
25141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25143 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25150 \begin_layout Standard
25151 \begin_inset Float table
25156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25157 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25162 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25166 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25176 \begin_inset Tabular
25177 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25178 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25179 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25180 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25212 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25239 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25266 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25299 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25326 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25353 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25387 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25414 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25448 \begin_layout Standard
25449 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25457 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25473 \begin_layout Standard
25474 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25475 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25480 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25481 space when you need a space in the box.
25482 Here is an example where
25483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25494 denotes the set of numbers:
25495 \begin_inset Formula
25497 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25505 \begin_layout Standard
25506 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25507 You can, for example, put a character in
25516 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25520 \begin_inset Newline newline
25523 So it is better not to use this feature.
25526 \begin_layout Standard
25527 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25528 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25532 \begin_inset Newline newline
25535 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25541 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25542 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25548 \begin_layout Standard
25555 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25558 \begin_layout Standard
25559 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25561 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25562 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25564 \begin_inset space ~
25572 \begin_layout Subsection
25574 \begin_inset Index idx
25577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25586 \begin_layout Standard
25587 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25589 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25593 \begin_inset space ~
25597 \begin_inset space ~
25605 \begin_inset space ~
25613 arg "math-insert \\font"
25617 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25618 in black instead of blue.
25619 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25620 Here is an example:
25621 \begin_inset Formula
25624 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25625 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25634 \begin_layout Subsection
25636 \begin_inset Index idx
25639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25648 \begin_layout Standard
25649 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25650 automatically chosen in most situations.
25668 For most characters,
25676 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25677 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25682 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25683 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25684 thinks are appropriate.
25685 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25688 arg "math-insert \\style"
25692 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25693 For example, you can set
25694 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25697 , which is normally in
25706 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25710 The four styles are used in the following example:
25713 \begin_layout Standard
25714 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25718 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25722 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25726 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25732 \begin_layout Standard
25733 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25734 is set in a particular size with the menu
25736 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25738 \begin_inset space ~
25743 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25744 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25745 will be adjusted to correspond.
25746 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25757 \begin_layout Standard
25761 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25767 \begin_layout Section
25768 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25770 \begin_inset Index idx
25773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25780 \begin_inset Index idx
25783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25792 \begin_layout Standard
25794 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25795 that are in common use.
25798 \begin_layout Subsection
25799 Enabling AMS-Support
25802 \begin_layout Standard
25803 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25804 the document by selecting the checkbox
25807 \begin_inset space ~
25811 \begin_inset space ~
25815 \begin_inset space ~
25822 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25826 \begin_inset Index idx
25829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25830 Document ! Settings
25838 \begin_inset space ~
25844 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25845 -errors in formulas,
25846 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25849 \begin_layout Subsection
25851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25853 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25858 \begin_inset Index idx
25861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25862 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25870 \begin_layout Standard
25871 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25872 provides a selection of different formula types.
25874 allows you to choose between
25895 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25896 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25902 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25905 \begin_layout Chapter
25909 \begin_layout Section
25911 \begin_inset Index idx
25914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25921 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25923 name "sec:Cross-References"
25930 \begin_layout Standard
25931 One of \SpecialChar LyX
25932 's strengths is cross-references.
25933 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25935 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25936 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25937 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25940 \begin_layout Enumerate
25944 \begin_layout Enumerate
25945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25947 name "enu:Second-item"
25954 \begin_layout Enumerate
25958 \begin_layout Standard
25959 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25961 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25964 or by pressing the toolbar button
25971 A gray label box like this:
25972 \begin_inset Graphics
25973 filename clipart/label.png
25978 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25980 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26015 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26016 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26032 \begin_layout Standard
26033 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26035 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26038 or the toolbar button
26041 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26045 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26046 \begin_inset Graphics
26047 filename clipart/reference.png
26052 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26054 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26067 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26071 \begin_layout Standard
26072 As an alternative to
26074 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26077 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26082 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26083 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26085 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26097 \begin_layout Standard
26098 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26099 \begin_inset space ~
26103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26105 reference "enu:Second-item"
26112 \begin_layout Standard
26113 It is recommended to use a protected space
26117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26118 described in section
26119 \begin_inset space ~
26123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26125 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26134 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26135 line breaks between them.
26138 \begin_layout Standard
26139 There are six formats of cross-references:
26142 \begin_layout Description
26143 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26146 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26153 \begin_layout Description
26154 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26155 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26167 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26174 \begin_layout Description
26175 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26176 \begin_inset space ~
26180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26181 LatexCommand pageref
26182 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26189 \begin_layout Description
26191 \begin_inset space ~
26195 \begin_inset space ~
26198 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26200 LatexCommand vpageref
26201 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26206 \begin_inset Newline newline
26209 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26210 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26211 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26212 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26213 it prints “on the next page”.
26214 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26217 \begin_layout Description
26219 \begin_inset space ~
26223 \begin_inset space ~
26227 \begin_inset space ~
26230 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26233 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26238 \begin_inset Newline newline
26241 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26247 ; otherwise it behaves like
26251 \begin_inset space ~
26255 \begin_inset space ~
26264 \begin_layout Description
26266 \begin_inset space ~
26269 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26270 \begin_inset Newline newline
26274 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26282 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26292 \begin_inset Index idx
26295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26297 -packages ! prettyref
26303 \begin_inset Index idx
26306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26308 -packages ! refstyle
26319 \begin_inset Newline newline
26322 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26323 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26326 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26330 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26331 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26339 is the default and preferred because
26343 supports only English documents.
26344 The format is specified by using the command
26356 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26357 preamble of the document.
26358 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26371 ) can be done with this command
26372 \begin_inset Newline newline
26379 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26384 \begin_inset Newline newline
26387 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26389 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26391 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26398 \begin_layout Description
26400 \begin_inset space ~
26403 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26405 LatexCommand nameref
26406 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26413 \begin_layout Standard
26414 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26415 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26417 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26421 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26425 \begin_layout Standard
26426 You can only use the style
26430 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26434 is always possible.
26437 \begin_layout Standard
26438 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26439 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26441 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26442 \begin_inset space ~
26446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26448 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26455 \begin_layout Standard
26456 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26460 \begin_inset space ~
26464 \begin_inset space ~
26469 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26470 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26473 \begin_inset space ~
26478 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26479 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26482 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26488 \begin_layout Standard
26489 You can change labels at any time.
26490 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26491 do not need to think about this.
26494 \begin_layout Standard
26495 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26497 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26501 \begin_layout Standard
26502 References are described in detail in the section
26503 \begin_inset space ~
26507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26517 \begin_inset space ~
26525 \begin_layout Section
26526 Table of Contents and other Listings
26527 \begin_inset Index idx
26530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26537 \begin_inset Index idx
26540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26556 \begin_layout Subsection
26558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26560 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26567 \begin_layout Standard
26568 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26570 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26571 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26573 \begin_inset space ~
26577 \begin_inset space ~
26583 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26585 If you click on it, the
26589 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26590 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26591 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26593 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26595 \begin_inset space ~
26600 that is described in section
26601 \begin_inset space ~
26605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26607 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26614 \begin_layout Standard
26615 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26616 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26618 \begin_inset space ~
26622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26624 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26628 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26630 \begin_inset space ~
26634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26636 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26640 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26642 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26645 \begin_layout Subsection
26646 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26649 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26656 \begin_layout Standard
26657 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26659 You can insert them via the
26661 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26665 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26668 \begin_layout Section
26669 URLs and Hyperlinks
26670 \begin_inset Index idx
26673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26680 \begin_inset Index idx
26683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26692 \begin_layout Subsection
26694 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26703 \begin_layout Standard
26704 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26712 \begin_layout Standard
26713 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26715 \begin_inset Flex URL
26718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26728 \begin_layout Standard
26729 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26735 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26739 \begin_layout Standard
26740 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26748 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26757 \begin_layout Subsection
26759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26761 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26768 \begin_layout Standard
26769 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26771 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26774 or with the toolbar button
26781 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26790 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26791 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26792 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26794 name "LyX's homepage"
26795 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26799 , an Email address like this:
26800 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26802 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26803 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26808 , or a link to a file.
26811 \begin_layout Standard
26812 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26825 to the link target.
26828 \begin_layout Standard
26829 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26830 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26831 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26832 the text style dialog.
26833 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26837 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26839 name "LyX's homepage"
26840 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26847 \begin_layout Standard
26848 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26852 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26854 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26855 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26859 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26861 \begin_inset Newline newline
26869 \begin_inset Newline newline
26876 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26879 \begin_layout Section
26881 \begin_inset Index idx
26884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26893 name "sec:Appendices"
26900 \begin_layout Standard
26901 Appendices are created with the menu
26903 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26905 \begin_inset space ~
26909 \begin_inset space ~
26915 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26916 as the appendix part of the book.
26917 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26920 \begin_layout Standard
26921 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26922 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26923 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26924 and the subsection number.
26925 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26929 \begin_layout Standard
26931 \begin_inset space ~
26935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26937 reference "chap:Credits"
26942 \begin_inset space ~
26946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26948 reference "subsec:Export"
26955 \begin_layout Section
26957 \begin_inset Index idx
26960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26969 name "sec:Bibliography"
26976 \begin_layout Standard
26977 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
26979 You can include a bibliography database,
26983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26984 Known under the name
26985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26988 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26998 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26999 manually, using the paragraph environment
27003 , which was described in section
27004 \begin_inset space ~
27008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27010 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27015 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27016 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27020 use a bibliography database.
27023 \begin_layout Subsection
27024 The Bibliography Environment
27027 \begin_layout Standard
27032 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27034 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27043 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27045 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27055 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27058 \begin_layout Standard
27059 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27061 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27064 or the toolbar button
27067 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27071 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27072 containing the available citations.
27073 Select one or more keys from the list and
27083 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27084 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27088 \begin_layout Standard
27089 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27090 entry with surrounding brackets.
27095 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27096 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27108 \begin_layout Standard
27112 Companion Second Edition
27115 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27117 key "latexcompanion"
27124 \begin_layout Standard
27125 The \SpecialChar LyX
27126 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27127 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27136 \begin_layout Standard
27137 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27140 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27142 \begin_inset space ~
27150 arg "layout-paragraph"
27154 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27157 \begin_layout Subsection
27158 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27160 \begin_inset Index idx
27163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27164 Bibliography ! Databases
27170 \begin_inset Index idx
27173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27174 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27181 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27183 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27190 \begin_layout Standard
27191 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27197 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27199 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27200 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27205 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27207 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27208 your working field in a database.
27209 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27210 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27211 list for that document.
27212 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27216 \begin_layout Standard
27217 The database is a text file with the file extension
27218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27229 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27230 The format is explained in
27231 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27237 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27239 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27241 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27246 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27247 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27248 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27250 \begin_inset Flex URL
27253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27255 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27263 \begin_layout Standard
27264 To use a database, use the menu
27266 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27271 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27273 \begin_inset space ~
27279 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27280 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27287 Add bibliography to TOC
27289 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27294 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27295 in the document or just the cited references.
27298 \begin_layout Standard
27299 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27311 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27312 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27313 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27314 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27316 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27322 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27323 \begin_inset Newline newline
27327 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27329 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27341 \begin_layout Standard
27342 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27345 \begin_layout Standard
27346 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27347 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27349 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27356 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27357 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27362 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27363 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27364 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27368 The following variants are possible:
27371 \begin_layout Description
27372 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27373 with other bibliography packages (e.
27374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27378 \begin_inset space \space{}
27385 ), only with the package
27389 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27393 \begin_layout Description
27394 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27395 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27396 with all bibliography packages, except
27401 \begin_layout Description
27402 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27407 , works with all bibliography packages
27410 \begin_layout Standard
27411 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27412 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27414 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27417 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27421 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27430 \begin_layout Standard
27431 When you select the option
27433 Sectioned bibliography
27437 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27438 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27441 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27442 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27444 Customizing Bibliographies
27448 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27453 Additional Features
27458 \begin_layout Standard
27459 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27460 the two methods of creating them.
27461 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27462 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27463 We used the style file
27467 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27470 \begin_layout Subsection
27472 \begin_inset Index idx
27475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27476 Bibliography ! Citation format
27484 \begin_layout Standard
27485 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27486 For this feature you need to enable the option
27492 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27496 \begin_inset Index idx
27499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27500 Document ! Settings
27510 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27511 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27512 style files as explained in
27513 the previous section.
27516 \begin_layout Standard
27517 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27518 the citation reference window.
27519 Here is an example where the text
27520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27524 \begin_inset space ~
27528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27531 appears after the reference:
27534 \begin_layout Standard
27536 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27539 key "latexcompanion"
27546 \begin_layout Section
27548 \begin_inset Index idx
27551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27567 \begin_layout Standard
27568 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27570 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27572 \begin_inset space ~
27577 or the toolbar button
27584 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27585 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27586 by \SpecialChar LyX
27587 as the index entry.
27590 \begin_layout Standard
27591 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27593 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27594 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27596 \begin_inset space ~
27602 A light blue box labeled
27603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27614 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27615 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27619 \begin_layout Standard
27620 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27621 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27622 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27623 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27625 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27627 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27634 \begin_layout Subsection
27635 Grouping Index Entries
27636 \begin_inset Index idx
27639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27648 \begin_layout Standard
27649 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27651 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27652 lists under the entry
27653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27661 First we create the entry
27662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27670 \begin_inset space ~
27674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27676 reference "subsec:Lists"
27681 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27682 \begin_inset space ~
27686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27688 reference "sec:Itemize"
27692 , we insert the command
27695 \begin_layout Standard
27701 \begin_layout Standard
27705 \begin_layout Standard
27711 \begin_layout Standard
27712 for the enumerated list in section
27713 \begin_inset space ~
27717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27719 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27726 \begin_layout Standard
27727 The exclamation mark
27728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27735 marks the grouping levels.
27736 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27737 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27738 If we don't have an index entry for
27739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27746 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27749 \begin_layout Subsection
27751 \begin_inset Index idx
27754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27755 Index ! Page ranges
27763 \begin_layout Standard
27764 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27766 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27767 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27768 an index entry in section
27769 \begin_inset space ~
27773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27775 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27782 \begin_layout Standard
27785 Paragraph environments|(
27788 \begin_layout Standard
27789 and another entry at the end of section
27790 \begin_inset space ~
27794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27796 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27803 \begin_layout Standard
27806 Paragraph environments|)
27809 \begin_layout Standard
27811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27834 respectively start and end the index range.
27835 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27836 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27837 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27838 An example is the index entry
27839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27842 Document ! Settings
27843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27849 \begin_layout Subsection
27851 \begin_inset Index idx
27854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27855 Index ! Cross referencing
27863 \begin_layout Standard
27864 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27865 We referred for example in the index entry
27866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27874 \begin_inset space ~
27878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27880 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
27884 ) to the index entry
27885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27892 in the same section using the entry
27895 \begin_layout Standard
27898 GIF|see{Image formats}
27901 \begin_layout Standard
27902 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
27904 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27905 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27908 \begin_layout Subsection
27910 \begin_inset Index idx
27913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27914 Index ! Entry order
27922 \begin_layout Standard
27923 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27924 follow the rules for the index order.
27925 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
27930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27931 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27933 \begin_inset space ~
27937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27939 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27948 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27949 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27974 \begin_inset Index idx
27977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27978 Dummy entries ! maïs
27984 \begin_inset Index idx
27987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27988 Dummy entries ! maître
27994 \begin_inset Index idx
27997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27998 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28003 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28004 maïs, maison, maître.
28005 To achieve this, we use the command
28008 \begin_layout Standard
28011 previous entry@current entry
28014 \begin_layout Standard
28015 In our case we want to have
28016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28031 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28034 \begin_layout Standard
28040 \begin_layout Standard
28041 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28042 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28044 See the next subsection for an example.
28047 \begin_layout Standard
28048 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28054 \begin_layout Standard
28055 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28060 to generate the index (see sec.
28061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28067 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28076 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28077 -package aeguill in sec.
28078 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28084 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28088 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28089 -packages although all these index
28090 commands start with
28091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28104 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28109 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28112 \begin_layout Standard
28124 \begin_layout Standard
28136 \begin_layout Subsection
28138 \begin_inset Index idx
28141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28142 Index ! Entry layout
28150 \begin_layout Standard
28151 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28152 \begin_inset Index idx
28155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28158 This is an italic dummy entry
28163 You can also format the page number using the character
28164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28171 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28172 -command without a backslash.
28173 We can write for example
28176 \begin_layout Standard
28179 italic page number:|textit
28182 \begin_layout Standard
28183 to get the page number in italic.
28184 \begin_inset Index idx
28187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28188 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28193 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28194 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28212 \begin_inset space ~
28218 Have a look at section
28219 \begin_inset space ~
28223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28225 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28229 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28233 \begin_layout Standard
28234 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28242 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28246 to generate the index, see sec.
28247 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28253 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28262 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28267 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28268 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28271 key "latexcompanion"
28283 \begin_layout Standard
28284 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28286 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28287 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28288 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28289 If so, put the following in the preamble
28292 \begin_layout Standard
28304 \begin_layout Standard
28308 \begin_layout Standard
28314 \begin_layout Standard
28315 in the index entry.
28316 \begin_inset Index idx
28319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28320 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28325 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28326 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28327 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28330 \begin_layout Standard
28331 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28332 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28333 a bold font for all index entries.
28334 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28346 documentation for details,
28347 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28349 key "makeindex,xindy"
28356 \begin_layout Subsection
28358 \begin_inset Index idx
28361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28370 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28377 \begin_layout Standard
28378 If the index generation program
28382 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28383 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28387 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28388 distribution, is used.
28392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28397 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28398 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28399 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28400 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28401 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28411 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28413 dialog, see section
28414 \begin_inset space ~
28418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28420 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28425 The available options are listed and explained in
28426 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28428 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28433 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28437 \begin_layout Standard
28438 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28439 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28442 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28443 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28447 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28448 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28451 \begin_layout Subsection
28455 \begin_layout Standard
28456 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28457 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28465 next to the standard index.
28467 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28468 that add this feature.
28475 \begin_inset Index idx
28478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28480 -packages ! splitidx
28485 package to generate multiple indexes.
28486 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28492 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28494 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28501 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28502 style, but it also includes
28503 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28504 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28512 \begin_layout Standard
28513 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28514 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28516 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28517 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28520 and select the option
28522 Use multiple Indexes
28529 already contains the standard index
28530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28538 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28539 also appear as a heading) to the
28543 input field and press the
28548 The new index now also appears in the list.
28549 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28550 label color to the new index.
28553 \begin_layout Standard
28554 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28557 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28564 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28565 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28566 are additional features:
28569 \begin_layout Itemize
28570 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28571 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28574 \begin_layout Itemize
28575 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28576 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28584 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28585 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28586 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28587 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28590 \begin_layout Section
28591 Nomenclature/Glossary
28592 \begin_inset Index idx
28595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28602 \begin_inset Index idx
28605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28634 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28636 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28643 \begin_layout Standard
28644 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28645 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28646 called nomenclature or glossary.
28649 \begin_layout Standard
28650 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28657 \begin_inset Index idx
28660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28662 -packages ! nomencl
28668 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28670 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28676 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28680 \begin_layout Standard
28681 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28682 and then use the menu
28684 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28690 \begin_inset space ~
28695 or the toolbar button
28698 arg "nomencl-insert"
28703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28714 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28717 \begin_layout Standard
28718 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28719 The first is the term or
28723 that you wish to define.
28728 of the term or symbol.
28731 \begin_layout Standard
28732 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28740 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28741 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28749 \begin_layout Subsection
28750 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28751 \begin_inset Index idx
28754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28755 Nomenclature ! Layout
28763 \begin_layout Standard
28764 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28768 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28775 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28783 \begin_inset Newline newline
28791 \begin_inset Newline newline
28797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28804 character starts/ends the formula.
28805 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28806 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28818 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28828 \begin_layout Standard
28829 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28830 -syntax is given in section
28831 \begin_inset space ~
28835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28837 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28844 \begin_layout Standard
28848 \begin_inset space ~
28853 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28855 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28860 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28867 in this document is:
28868 \begin_inset Newline newline
28873 dummy entry for the character
28878 \begin_inset Newline newline
28890 \begin_inset space ~
28900 font use the command
28929 \begin_layout Standard
28930 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
28931 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28935 \begin_inset space \space{}
28939 \begin_inset Newline newline
28955 \begin_inset Newline newline
28958 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
28959 This command will make the font of all symbols
28966 \begin_inset space ~
28974 \begin_layout Standard
28975 If the characters |
28976 \begin_inset space \space{}
28980 \begin_inset space \space{}
28984 \begin_inset space \space{}
28988 \begin_inset space \space{}
28992 \begin_inset space \space{}
28995 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28996 a quote character in front of them.
28997 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28998 LatexCommand nomenclature
28999 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29000 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29007 \begin_layout Subsection
29008 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29009 \begin_inset Index idx
29012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29013 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29021 \begin_layout Standard
29022 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29023 -code of the symbol
29025 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29027 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29030 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29031 LatexCommand nomenclature
29033 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29040 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29044 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29045 LatexCommand nomenclature
29048 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29053 They will be sorted by
29054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29080 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29083 will be sorted before the
29087 since the character
29088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29095 is considered in sorting.
29098 \begin_layout Standard
29099 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29102 \begin_inset space ~
29107 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29108 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29110 For the example given, you can insert
29114 in this field for the
29115 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29122 will be located before
29123 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29129 \begin_layout Standard
29130 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29135 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29144 \begin_layout Subsection
29145 Nomenclature Options
29146 \begin_inset Index idx
29149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29150 Nomenclature ! Options
29158 \begin_layout Standard
29163 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29164 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29167 \begin_layout Description
29168 refeq Appends the phrase
29169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29184 to every nomenclature entry, where
29190 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29193 \begin_layout Description
29194 refpage Appends the phrase
29195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29210 to every nomenclature entry, where
29216 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29219 \begin_layout Description
29220 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29223 \begin_layout Standard
29224 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29225 class options list in the
29227 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29231 In this document the options
29238 \begin_layout Standard
29239 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29245 \begin_layout Standard
29246 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29247 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29252 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29255 \begin_layout Description
29265 \begin_layout Description
29268 nomrefpage Like the
29275 \begin_layout Description
29278 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29287 \begin_layout Description
29291 \begin_inset space ~
29297 \begin_inset space ~
29302 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29305 \begin_layout Standard
29307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29314 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29315 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29319 \begin_layout Standard
29327 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29330 \begin_inset Newline newline
29337 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29342 \begin_inset Newline newline
29346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29361 by their translation.
29364 \begin_layout Subsection
29365 Printing the Nomenclature
29366 \begin_inset Index idx
29369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29370 Nomenclature ! Printing
29378 \begin_layout Standard
29379 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29381 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29382 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29398 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29399 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29400 You can choose between these settings:
29403 \begin_layout Description
29404 Default a space of 1
29405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29411 \begin_layout Description
29413 \begin_inset space ~
29417 \begin_inset space ~
29420 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29423 \begin_layout Description
29424 Custom custom space
29427 \begin_layout Standard
29428 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29437 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29445 For example, in order to change the name to
29449 , add the following line to the preamble:
29452 \begin_layout Standard
29460 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29463 \begin_layout Subsection
29464 Nomenclature Program
29465 \begin_inset Index idx
29468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29469 Nomenclature ! Program
29475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29477 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29484 \begin_layout Standard
29490 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29491 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29493 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29498 by adding options, see section
29499 \begin_inset space ~
29503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29505 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29510 The available options are listed and explained in
29511 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29513 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29520 \begin_layout Section
29522 \begin_inset Index idx
29525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29532 \begin_inset Index idx
29535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29536 Document ! Branches
29542 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29544 name "sec:Branches"
29551 \begin_layout Standard
29552 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29553 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29554 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29555 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29558 \begin_layout Standard
29559 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29560 allows you to put text into branches.
29561 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29562 To create a branch, either select the menu
29564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29565 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29568 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29570 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29577 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29578 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29579 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29580 and whether the name of the branch should
29581 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29582 (see below for an example).
29583 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29584 to the name of the other) and to add
29585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29593 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29597 \begin_inset space ~
29600 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29601 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29604 \begin_layout Standard
29605 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29606 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29608 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29611 where you can choose a branch.
29612 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29616 \begin_layout Standard
29617 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29618 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29621 \begin_layout Standard
29622 \begin_inset Branch Question
29625 \begin_layout Standard
29626 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29634 \begin_layout Standard
29635 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29638 \begin_layout Standard
29639 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29647 \begin_layout Standard
29654 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29655 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29658 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29659 Consider for example a file
29660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29667 which has the above branches.
29669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29676 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29700 branch were inactive,
29701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29716 branch was active, likewise
29717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29732 branch was active, and
29733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29736 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29740 if both branches were active.
29741 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29744 \begin_layout Standard
29745 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29751 \begin_layout Standard
29752 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29753 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29754 definitions for each branch.
29755 For example you can define for the question branch
29759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29760 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29761 -syntax, see section
29762 \begin_inset space ~
29766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29768 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29780 \begin_layout Standard
29790 \begin_layout Standard
29800 \begin_layout Standard
29801 and for the answer branch
29804 \begin_layout Standard
29814 \begin_layout Standard
29824 \begin_layout Standard
29825 \begin_inset Branch Question
29828 \begin_layout Standard
29832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29860 \begin_layout Standard
29861 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29864 \begin_layout Standard
29868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29896 \begin_layout Standard
29897 Now it is possible to use the
29901 question{\SpecialChar ldots
29908 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
29911 commands to obtain conditional output.
29912 Here is an example formula where only the
29919 \begin_inset Formula
29921 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29929 \begin_layout Standard
29930 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29938 \begin_layout Standard
29939 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29941 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29945 \begin_inset space \space{}
29948 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
29950 For this advanced usage, see the
29955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29958 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29965 \begin_layout Section
29967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29969 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29974 \begin_inset Index idx
29977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29986 \begin_layout Standard
29989 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29990 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29993 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29995 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30001 \begin_inset Index idx
30004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30006 -packages ! hyperref
30011 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30012 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30013 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30014 part of the document.
30018 \begin_layout Standard
30019 The header information in the dialog tab
30023 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30024 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30025 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30026 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30030 \begin_inset space ~
30034 \begin_inset space ~
30039 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30040 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30041 and author entries.
30045 \begin_inset space ~
30049 \begin_inset space ~
30053 \begin_inset space ~
30058 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30061 \begin_layout Standard
30062 You can specify in the dialog tab
30066 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30071 \begin_inset space ~
30075 \begin_inset space ~
30079 \begin_inset space ~
30084 option allows long links to be split;
30087 \begin_inset space ~
30091 \begin_inset space ~
30095 \begin_inset space ~
30103 \begin_inset space ~
30108 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30111 \begin_inset space ~
30116 colors the different links.
30117 The default colors are:
30120 \begin_layout Labeling
30121 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30126 for hyperlinks and URLs
30129 \begin_layout Labeling
30130 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30138 \begin_layout Labeling
30139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30147 \begin_layout Standard
30148 but you can change these in the field
30153 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30156 \begin_layout Standard
30159 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30162 \begin_layout Standard
30167 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30168 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30169 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30172 \begin_layout Standard
30177 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30178 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30179 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30189 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30190 when opening the PDF.
30192 \begin_inset space ~
30195 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30196 \begin_inset space ~
30199 1 will only display the sections.
30202 \begin_layout Standard
30203 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30204 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30210 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30211 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30220 \begin_layout Section
30222 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30226 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30233 \begin_layout Subsection
30236 \begin_inset Index idx
30239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30247 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30249 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30256 \begin_layout Standard
30257 As \SpecialChar LyX
30258 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30259 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30260 commands and constructs,
30263 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30264 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30265 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30266 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30267 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30268 cannot support all packages and
30272 \begin_layout Standard
30273 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30274 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30275 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30279 Code box is created by the menu
30281 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30283 \begin_inset space ~
30288 or by the toolbar button
30301 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30309 \begin_layout Standard
30310 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30312 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30314 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30315 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30322 , you can write the command part
30328 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30329 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30333 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30334 Code box behind the word.
30335 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30336 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30340 \begin_layout Standard
30341 \begin_inset Graphics
30342 filename clipart/ERT.png
30350 \begin_layout Standard
30354 \begin_layout Standard
30355 This is a line with a
30359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30382 \begin_layout Standard
30383 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30391 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30392 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30393 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30394 know that the command is finished.
30402 \begin_layout Subsection
30403 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30405 \begin_inset Argument 1
30408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30409 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30416 \begin_inset Index idx
30419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30429 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30436 \begin_layout Standard
30437 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30438 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30439 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30440 uses in the background.
30441 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30442 is based on commands, you can
30443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30451 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30452 any time if you know the right commands.
30453 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30454 is the end of the day.
30455 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30456 all caption labels bold.
30457 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30459 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30463 \begin_layout Standard
30464 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30466 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30468 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30471 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30480 \begin_layout Standard
30481 As result you find that the package
30486 \begin_inset Index idx
30489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30491 -packages ! caption
30497 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30499 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30502 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30506 \begin_inset space ~
30514 \begin_layout Standard
30519 usepackage[options]{package name}
30522 \begin_layout Standard
30523 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30524 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30525 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30526 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30529 \begin_layout Standard
30530 In your case the package name is
30535 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30540 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30541 So you add the command
30544 \begin_layout Standard
30549 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30552 \begin_layout Standard
30553 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30558 For more commands provided by the
30562 package, have a look at its documentation,
30563 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30577 \begin_layout Standard
30578 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30580 For example if you use a
30584 class, you don't need the package
30588 , you can instead write
30591 \begin_layout Standard
30596 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30601 \begin_layout Standard
30602 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30603 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30604 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30611 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30614 \begin_layout Standard
30615 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30616 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30618 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30619 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30620 Code box as described in the previous
30624 \begin_layout Standard
30625 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30626 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30629 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30631 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30638 \begin_layout Standard
30639 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30645 \begin_layout Standard
30649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30659 \begin_inset Note Note
30662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30663 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30671 \begin_layout Left Header
30672 \begin_inset Argument 1
30675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30695 \begin_inset Note Note
30698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30699 defines the header line as described below
30707 \begin_layout Center Header
30708 \begin_inset Argument 1
30711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30720 \begin_layout Right Header
30721 \begin_inset Argument 1
30724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30745 \begin_layout Left Footer
30746 \begin_inset Argument 1
30749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30770 \begin_layout Center Footer
30771 \begin_inset Argument 1
30774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30786 \begin_inset Newline newline
30790 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30796 \begin_layout Right Footer
30797 \begin_inset Argument 1
30800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30822 \begin_layout Section
30823 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30826 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30831 \begin_inset Index idx
30834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30835 Document ! Header/Footer line
30841 \begin_inset Index idx
30844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30853 \begin_layout Standard
30854 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30858 \begin_inset space ~
30869 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30875 \begin_inset space ~
30881 As a second step add in the menu
30883 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30884 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30891 Custom Header/Footerlines
30892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30896 This module offers the following 6
30897 \begin_inset space ~
30903 \begin_layout Description
30905 \begin_inset space ~
30909 \begin_inset space ~
30913 \begin_inset space ~
30917 \begin_inset space ~
30921 \begin_inset space ~
30927 \begin_layout Description
30929 \begin_inset space ~
30933 \begin_inset space ~
30937 \begin_inset space ~
30941 \begin_inset space ~
30945 \begin_inset space ~
30951 \begin_layout Standard
30952 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30955 \begin_layout Standard
30956 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30957 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30959 \begin_inset space ~
30963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30965 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30969 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30972 \begin_layout Standard
30973 \begin_inset Float figure
30979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30982 \begin_inset Tabular
30983 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30984 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30985 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30986 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30987 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30989 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31007 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31018 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31036 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31047 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31051 The normal text on the page goes here.
31052 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31054 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31055 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31060 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31069 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31080 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31098 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31109 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31127 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31145 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31148 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31150 name "fig:Page-layout"
31154 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31167 \begin_layout Standard
31168 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31176 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31180 \begin_inset space ~
31185 is set to “Default”.
31186 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31195 \begin_layout Subsection
31199 \begin_layout Standard
31200 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31201 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31202 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31203 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31205 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31206 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31209 \begin_layout Standard
31210 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31211 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31215 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31217 \begin_inset space ~
31225 \begin_layout Description
31228 thepage prints the current page number
31231 \begin_layout Description
31234 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31237 \begin_layout Description
31240 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31243 \begin_layout Description
31246 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31247 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31254 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31257 because it usually goes in a left header.
31260 \begin_layout Description
31263 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31264 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31266 It is normally used in the right header.
31269 \begin_layout Subsection
31270 Default header/footer
31273 \begin_layout Standard
31274 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31275 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31276 footer has the page number.
31277 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31278 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31279 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31282 \begin_inset space ~
31290 \begin_layout Subsection
31294 \begin_layout Standard
31295 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31296 Some pages are different.
31297 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31298 a new part or chapter in your book.
31299 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31300 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31301 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31304 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31305 Header and footer decoration line
31308 \begin_layout Standard
31309 By default, you get a 0.4
31310 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31313 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31314 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31326 in the following way:
31329 \begin_layout Standard
31336 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31339 \begin_layout Standard
31340 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31349 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31356 \begin_layout Standard
31357 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31359 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31360 \begin_inset space ~
31364 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31373 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31374 Several header/footer lines
31377 \begin_layout Standard
31378 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31379 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31380 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31382 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31397 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31398 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31400 \begin_inset space ~
31408 \begin_layout Standard
31415 headheight}{height}
31418 \begin_layout Standard
31419 where height is a size in standard units.
31420 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31421 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31422 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31423 logfile with the menu
31425 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31431 \begin_inset space ~
31436 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31441 \begin_inset Index idx
31444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31446 -packages ! fancyhdr
31452 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31453 for your header/footer.
31456 \begin_layout Subsection
31460 \begin_layout Standard
31461 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31462 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31463 This example consists of the following definition:
31466 \begin_layout Description
31468 \begin_inset space ~
31477 , empty optional argument
31480 \begin_layout Description
31482 \begin_inset space ~
31485 Header empty, empty optional argument
31488 \begin_layout Description
31490 \begin_inset space ~
31499 in the optional argument
31502 \begin_layout Description
31504 \begin_inset space ~
31513 in the optional argument
31516 \begin_layout Description
31518 \begin_inset space ~
31531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31535 \begin_inset Newline newline
31539 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31546 in the optional argument
31549 \begin_layout Description
31551 \begin_inset space ~
31560 , empty optional argument
31563 \begin_layout Description
31566 headrulewidth set to 2
31567 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31573 \begin_layout Standard
31574 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31575 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31581 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31590 \begin_layout Standard
31591 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31597 \begin_layout Standard
31601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31605 pagestyle{headings}
31611 \begin_inset Note Note
31614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31615 switches back to page style with the default headings
31623 \begin_layout Section
31624 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31627 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31632 \begin_inset Index idx
31635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31642 \begin_inset Index idx
31645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31654 \begin_layout Standard
31656 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31657 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31658 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31661 \begin_layout Subsection
31665 \begin_layout Standard
31666 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31672 \begin_inset Index idx
31675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31677 -packages ! preview-latex
31682 (on some systems named simply
31687 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31689 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31695 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31697 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31705 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31706 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31707 -package are automatically
31708 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31712 \begin_layout Subsection
31716 \begin_layout Standard
31717 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31718 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31720 activate the option
31723 \begin_inset space ~
31730 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31736 \begin_inset space ~
31740 \begin_inset space ~
31743 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31750 \begin_inset space ~
31763 \begin_inset space ~
31768 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31771 \begin_layout Standard
31772 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31777 \begin_inset space ~
31785 \begin_inset space ~
31793 \begin_layout Standard
31794 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31795 and when you finish
31799 \begin_layout Standard
31800 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31808 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31809 generated by activating the option
31812 \begin_inset space ~
31818 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31826 \begin_layout Subsection
31827 Selected document parts
31830 \begin_layout Standard
31831 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31832 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31833 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31834 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31836 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31838 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31842 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31843 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31844 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31847 \begin_layout Standard
31848 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31855 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31867 is explained in section
31869 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31874 \begin_inset space ~
31884 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
31885 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31886 the final rotated boxes,
31887 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
31888 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31890 Here is the result:
31893 \begin_layout Standard
31894 \begin_inset Preview
31896 \begin_layout Standard
31901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31905 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31911 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31921 height_special "totalheight"
31926 backgroundcolor "none"
31929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31954 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31960 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31982 \begin_layout Standard
31983 Previewing works also for colors.
31984 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32003 is explained in section
32010 \begin_inset space ~
32023 \begin_layout Standard
32024 \begin_inset Preview
32026 \begin_layout Standard
32030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32049 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32054 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32073 \begin_layout Standard
32074 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32080 \begin_layout Standard
32081 If \SpecialChar LyX
32082 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32083 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32084 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32085 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32086 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32087 the \SpecialChar TeX
32089 If \SpecialChar LyX
32090 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32091 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32093 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32094 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32095 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32098 \begin_layout Subsection
32103 \begin_layout Standard
32104 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32105 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32108 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32110 \begin_inset space ~
32115 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32117 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32119 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32120 's main window, then only this selection
32121 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32122 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32123 the source view window.
32128 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32129 ; but note that if you have
32130 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32132 not just the one which is open at the time.
32135 \begin_layout Section
32136 Advanced Find and Replace
32137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32139 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32144 \begin_inset Index idx
32147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32154 \begin_inset Index idx
32157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32166 \begin_layout Subsection
32170 \begin_layout Standard
32171 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32172 allows for searching of complex,
32173 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32175 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32176 The key-features are:
32179 \begin_layout Itemize
32180 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32181 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32182 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32186 \begin_layout Itemize
32187 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32188 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32189 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32190 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32193 \begin_layout Itemize
32194 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32195 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32196 outside of mathematics environments
32199 \begin_layout Itemize
32200 Search may be widened to a specific
32205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32209 \begin_inset space ~
32212 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32213 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32220 \begin_layout Itemize
32221 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32222 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32223 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32227 \begin_inset space ~
32230 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32233 \begin_layout Subsection
32237 \begin_layout Standard
32238 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32240 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32253 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32256 ) or the toolbar button
32259 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32265 Advanced Find and Replace
32270 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32274 \begin_layout Standard
32280 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32284 \begin_inset space ~
32289 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32292 arg "paragraph-break"
32296 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32297 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32301 arg "paragraph-break"
32304 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32308 searches backwards.
32311 \begin_layout Standard
32315 \begin_inset space ~
32320 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32329 \begin_inset space ~
32334 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32337 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32338 Searching for mathematics
32341 \begin_layout Standard
32342 Mathematical formulas, such as
32343 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32346 or something more complex like
32347 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32350 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32355 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32356 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32357 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32358 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32364 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32368 \begin_layout Standard
32369 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32370 This is done by switching to the
32374 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32379 This way, entering in the
32386 \begin_layout Itemize
32387 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32388 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32391 \begin_layout Itemize
32392 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32393 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32396 \begin_layout Itemize
32397 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32398 of it only within section headings.
32399 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32400 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32404 \begin_layout Itemize
32405 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32406 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32409 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32413 \begin_layout Standard
32414 The entries made in the
32418 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32421 \begin_inset space ~
32427 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32431 button or alternatively press
32434 arg "paragraph-break"
32441 while the cursor is in the
32444 \begin_inset space ~
32452 \begin_layout Standard
32453 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32455 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32459 \begin_layout Itemize
32460 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32461 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32469 with its typewriter version
32470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32484 \begin_layout Itemize
32485 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32491 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32503 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32510 (you may want to enable the
32513 \begin_inset space ~
32521 \begin_inset space ~
32526 options and disable the
32534 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32542 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32543 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32547 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32550 , or occurrences of
32551 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32555 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32561 \begin_layout Subsection
32565 \begin_layout Standard
32566 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32571 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32573 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32575 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32584 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32590 This is done with the context menu
32592 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32593 Insert Regular Expression
32595 while the cursor is in the
32600 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32601 expression matching rules
32605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32606 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32609 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32613 \begin_inset space ~
32616 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32617 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32623 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32624 same text in the document.
32625 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32626 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32629 \begin_layout Enumerate
32630 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32635 editor the fraction
32636 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32640 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32643 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32644 fractions with the given denominator.
32647 \begin_layout Enumerate
32648 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32660 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32665 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32666 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32667 Also, by inserting a
32668 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32671 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32672 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32675 \begin_layout Standard
32676 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32677 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32678 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32681 , and referring back to them through
32682 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32686 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32690 For example, try searching with the regexp
32691 \begin_inset Newline newline
32694 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32697 \begin_inset Newline newline
32700 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32703 \begin_layout Standard
32704 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32707 \begin_layout Standard
32708 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32716 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32717 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32718 sub-expressions is absolute.
32720 \begin_inset space ~
32724 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32727 always refers to the first occurrence of
32728 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32731 in all entered regexps.
32739 \begin_layout Section
32741 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32743 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32748 \begin_inset Index idx
32751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32760 \begin_layout Standard
32762 has a built-in spell checker.
32765 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32772 key or the toolbar button
32775 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32778 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32779 beginning of the currently selected text.
32780 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32781 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32782 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32783 scrolled so that it is visible.
32784 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32785 n, if any could be found.
32786 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32790 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32791 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32794 \begin_layout Standard
32795 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32798 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32802 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32803 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32805 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32806 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32809 \begin_inset space ~
32817 arg "dialog-show character"
32820 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32822 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32825 \begin_layout Standard
32826 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32827 can be downloaded from here:
32828 \begin_inset Newline newline
32832 \begin_inset Flex URL
32835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32837 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32843 \begin_inset Newline newline
32847 \begin_inset space ~
32850 files for each language.
32851 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32852 \begin_inset space ~
32855 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32856 's installation subfolder
32864 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32866 \begin_inset Newline newline
32869 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32870 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32871 but in most cases these are
32887 is the language code.
32890 \begin_layout Subsection
32894 \begin_layout Standard
32897 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32898 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32900 \begin_inset space ~
32903 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32906 you can set the following things:
32909 \begin_layout Description
32911 \begin_inset space ~
32914 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
32915 should use for spell checking.
32916 Depending on your platform,
32930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32931 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32932 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32947 \begin_inset space ~
32950 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
32953 \begin_layout Description
32955 \begin_inset space ~
32958 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
32959 will always use the given language
32960 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32963 \begin_layout Description
32965 \begin_inset space ~
32968 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32974 \begin_inset space \space{}
32978 This should normally not be needed.
32981 \begin_layout Description
32983 \begin_inset space ~
32987 \begin_inset space ~
32990 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33002 \begin_layout Description
33004 \begin_inset space ~
33007 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33008 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33009 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33010 appear in a context menu.
33011 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33015 \begin_layout Description
33017 \begin_inset space ~
33021 \begin_inset space ~
33025 \begin_inset space ~
33028 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33032 \begin_layout Section
33034 \begin_inset Index idx
33037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33046 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33053 \begin_layout Standard
33055 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33056 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33066 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33068 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33077 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33079 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33080 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33081 which are available for many languages.
33084 \begin_layout Standard
33085 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33086 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33090 \begin_layout Subsection
33091 Setting up the thesaurus
33094 \begin_layout Standard
33103 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33107 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33112 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33118 \begin_inset space ~
33126 For instance, the US English files are named:
33129 \begin_layout Itemize
33133 \begin_layout Itemize
33137 \begin_layout Standard
33146 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33147 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33150 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33151 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33152 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33154 \begin_inset space ~
33159 ) to the path where they are installed.
33163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33164 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33165 ies, typical locations are
33171 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33175 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33179 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33182 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33188 LibreOffice-<Version>
33195 On the Mac, the default location is
33197 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33198 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33199 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33200 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33201 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33202 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33210 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33211 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33212 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33216 \begin_layout Standard
33217 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33218 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33222 \begin_layout Itemize
33223 \begin_inset Flex URL
33226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33228 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33236 \begin_layout Standard
33237 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33238 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33240 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33241 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33242 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33244 \begin_inset space ~
33249 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33251 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33252 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33256 \begin_layout Standard
33257 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33259 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33262 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33268 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33271 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33272 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33280 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33281 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33282 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33284 \begin_inset space ~
33289 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33292 \begin_layout Subsection
33293 Using the thesaurus
33296 \begin_layout Standard
33297 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33299 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33302 or the toolbar button
33305 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33308 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33310 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33312 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33313 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33314 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33323 ), related terms (such as
33326 \begin_inset space ~
33335 ), compounds (such as
33338 \begin_inset space ~
33347 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33356 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33359 \begin_layout Standard
33360 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33361 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33365 \begin_layout Standard
33366 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33367 the dictionary, such as the above
33371 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33376 \begin_inset space \space{}
33379 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33380 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33381 For example, looking up the word form
33385 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33390 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33391 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33395 \begin_inset space \space{}
33406 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33407 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33408 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33411 \begin_layout Section
33413 \begin_inset Index idx
33416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33423 \begin_inset Index idx
33426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33427 Document ! Change Tracking
33433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33435 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33442 \begin_layout Standard
33443 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33444 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33445 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33446 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33448 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33450 \begin_inset space ~
33453 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33455 \begin_inset space ~
33463 \begin_layout Standard
33464 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33478 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33479 You can change the color in
33481 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33482 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33484 \begin_inset space ~
33488 \begin_inset space ~
33493 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33499 \begin_inset Index idx
33502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33503 Color ! Change tracking
33508 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33509 's status bar when the
33510 cursor is in changed text.
33511 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33514 arg "changes-merge"
33520 \begin_layout Standard
33521 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33523 \begin_inset Index idx
33526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33535 \begin_layout Standard
33536 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33542 \begin_layout Standard
33543 \begin_inset Graphics
33544 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33552 \begin_layout Standard
33553 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33559 \begin_layout Standard
33560 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33563 \begin_layout Standard
33564 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33570 \begin_layout Standard
33571 \begin_inset Tabular
33572 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33573 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33574 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33575 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33576 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33585 arg "changes-track"
33593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33599 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33601 \begin_inset space ~
33604 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33606 \begin_inset space ~
33615 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33624 arg "changes-output"
33632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33638 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33640 \begin_inset space ~
33643 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33645 \begin_inset space ~
33649 \begin_inset space ~
33653 \begin_inset space ~
33662 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33683 Jumps to the next change
33689 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33698 arg "change-accept"
33706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33712 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33714 \begin_inset space ~
33717 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33719 \begin_inset space ~
33728 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33737 arg "change-reject"
33745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33751 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33753 \begin_inset space ~
33756 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33758 \begin_inset space ~
33767 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33776 arg "changes-merge"
33784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33790 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33792 \begin_inset space ~
33795 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33797 \begin_inset space ~
33806 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33815 arg "all-changes-accept"
33823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33829 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33831 \begin_inset space ~
33834 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33836 \begin_inset space ~
33840 \begin_inset space ~
33849 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33858 arg "all-changes-reject"
33866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33872 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33874 \begin_inset space ~
33877 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33879 \begin_inset space ~
33883 \begin_inset space ~
33892 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33915 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33916 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
33918 \begin_inset space ~
33927 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33950 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33952 \begin_inset space ~
33968 \begin_layout Standard
33969 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33975 \begin_layout Standard
33976 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33996 \begin_layout Standard
33997 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33998 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33999 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34000 the next change after the current cursor position.
34001 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34002 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34003 step to the next change.
34004 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34007 \begin_layout Standard
34008 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34009 to describe a change.
34012 \begin_layout Standard
34013 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34019 \begin_inset Index idx
34022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34024 -packages ! dvipost
34030 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34032 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34038 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34042 \begin_layout Section
34043 Comparison of Documents
34044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34046 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34051 \begin_inset Index idx
34054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34055 Comparison of documents
34063 \begin_layout Standard
34064 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34067 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34071 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34072 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34074 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34076 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34080 \begin_inset space ~
34084 \begin_inset space ~
34088 \begin_inset space ~
34097 \begin_inset space ~
34101 \begin_inset space ~
34105 \begin_inset space ~
34109 \begin_inset space ~
34113 \begin_inset space ~
34117 \begin_inset space ~
34122 enables the change tracking option
34125 \begin_inset space ~
34129 \begin_inset space ~
34133 \begin_inset space ~
34138 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34141 \begin_layout Section
34142 International Support
34143 \begin_inset Index idx
34146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34147 International support
34155 \begin_layout Standard
34156 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34157 with any language you want.
34158 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34159 up \SpecialChar LyX
34161 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34163 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34170 \begin_layout Standard
34171 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34172 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34173 \begin_inset space ~
34177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34179 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34186 \begin_layout Subsection
34188 \begin_inset Index idx
34191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34198 \begin_inset Index idx
34201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34202 Document ! Settings
34208 \begin_inset Index idx
34211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34212 Document ! Language
34220 \begin_layout Standard
34223 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34224 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34227 dialog lets you set
34229 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34234 \begin_layout Standard
34239 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34244 \begin_inset space ~
34249 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34250 For details about the different encoding options see section
34251 \begin_inset space ~
34255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34257 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34264 \begin_layout Subsection
34265 Keyboard mapping configuration
34266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34268 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34275 \begin_layout Standard
34276 If you have for example a U.
34277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34280 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34281 can use an alternate keymap.
34282 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34287 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34288 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34289 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34292 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34293 \begin_inset space ~
34297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34299 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34304 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34305 which one you want to use.
34308 \begin_layout Standard
34309 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34310 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34311 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34312 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34315 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34316 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34317 one to support the characters you want.
34318 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34325 \begin_layout Chapter
34328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34330 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34337 \begin_layout Standard
34338 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34339 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34340 topic inside the user's guide.
34343 \begin_layout Section
34345 \begin_inset Index idx
34348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34357 \begin_layout Standard
34362 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34365 \begin_layout Subsection
34369 \begin_layout Standard
34370 Creates a new document.
34373 \begin_layout Subsection
34377 \begin_layout Standard
34378 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34379 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34380 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34383 \begin_layout Subsection
34387 \begin_layout Standard
34391 \begin_layout Subsection
34395 \begin_layout Standard
34396 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34397 Click there on a file to open it.
34400 \begin_layout Subsection
34404 \begin_layout Standard
34405 Closes the current document.
34408 \begin_layout Subsection
34412 \begin_layout Standard
34413 Closes all opened documents.
34416 \begin_layout Subsection
34420 \begin_layout Standard
34421 Saves the actual document.
34424 \begin_layout Subsection
34428 \begin_layout Standard
34429 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34432 \begin_layout Subsection
34436 \begin_layout Standard
34437 Saves all opened documents.
34440 \begin_layout Subsection
34444 \begin_layout Standard
34445 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34448 \begin_layout Subsection
34452 \begin_layout Standard
34453 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34454 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34455 It is described in the section
34457 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34462 Additional Features
34467 \begin_layout Subsection
34471 \begin_layout Standard
34472 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34473 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34475 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34476 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34480 \begin_layout Standard
34481 When using the menu entry
34484 \begin_inset space ~
34489 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34493 \begin_inset space ~
34497 \begin_inset space ~
34501 \begin_inset space ~
34506 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34507 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34510 \begin_layout Subsection
34512 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34514 name "subsec:Export"
34521 \begin_layout Standard
34522 You can export your document to various file formats.
34523 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34525 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34526 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34527 during its configuration.
34530 \begin_layout Standard
34531 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34533 \begin_inset space ~
34537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34539 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34546 \begin_layout Description
34552 \begin_inset space ~
34555 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34557 \begin_inset space ~
34560 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34561 \begin_inset Newline newline
34564 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34565 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34569 \begin_layout Description
34570 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34576 \begin_layout Description
34578 \begin_inset space ~
34581 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34587 \begin_layout Description
34588 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34589 's native DVI-format.
34590 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34591 files paths or file names in your document.
34593 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34600 \begin_layout Description
34601 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34602 in files paths or file names
34605 \begin_layout Description
34607 \begin_inset space ~
34614 ) DVI-format using the program
34616 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34619 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34623 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34631 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34639 \begin_layout Description
34641 \begin_inset space ~
34644 (cropped) the same as
34648 but with cropped page margins.
34651 \begin_layout Description
34653 \begin_inset space ~
34656 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34660 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34665 \begin_layout Description
34669 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34677 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34685 \begin_layout Description
34687 \begin_inset space ~
34691 \begin_inset space ~
34694 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34698 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34706 \begin_layout Description
34710 \begin_inset space ~
34719 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34720 source that is compilable with the program
34722 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34726 \begin_layout Description
34730 \begin_inset space ~
34735 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34736 source, additionally all images used in the document
34737 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34741 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34744 \begin_layout Description
34748 \begin_inset space ~
34753 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34754 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34755 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34763 \begin_layout Description
34767 \begin_inset space ~
34776 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34777 source that is compilable with the program
34783 \begin_layout Description
34785 \begin_inset space ~
34789 \begin_inset space ~
34796 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34797 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34803 \begin_layout Description
34805 \begin_inset space ~
34808 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34809 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34815 \begin_inset space \space{}
34820 \begin_inset space ~
34824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34839 represent the version number)
34842 \begin_layout Description
34844 \begin_inset space ~
34848 \begin_inset space ~
34851 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34852 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34853 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34857 \begin_layout Description
34858 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34859 's internal XHTML engine
34862 \begin_layout Description
34864 \begin_inset space ~
34868 \begin_inset space ~
34872 \begin_inset space ~
34876 \begin_inset space ~
34879 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
34884 For the conversion the program
34893 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
34896 \begin_layout Description
34897 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34902 \begin_layout Description
34904 \begin_inset space ~
34907 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
34909 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34912 For the conversion the program
34921 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
34924 \begin_layout Description
34926 \begin_inset space ~
34929 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
34930 For the conversion the program
34939 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
34942 \begin_layout Description
34944 \begin_inset space ~
34947 (cropped) the same as
34950 \begin_inset space ~
34955 but with cropped page margins
34958 \begin_layout Description
34962 \begin_inset space ~
34967 PDF-format using the program
34971 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34974 \begin_layout Description
34978 \begin_inset space ~
34982 \begin_inset space ~
34990 \begin_inset space ~
34995 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34996 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35000 \begin_inset space \space{}
35003 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35007 \begin_layout Description
35011 \begin_inset space ~
35016 PDF-format using the program
35018 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35021 , produces PDF-files directly
35024 \begin_layout Description
35028 \begin_inset space ~
35033 PDF-format using the program
35037 , produces PDF-files directly
35040 \begin_layout Description
35044 \begin_inset space ~
35049 PDF-format using the program
35053 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35056 \begin_layout Description
35060 \begin_inset space ~
35065 PDF-format using the program
35070 , produces PDF-files directly
35073 \begin_layout Description
35077 \begin_inset space ~
35085 \begin_layout Description
35089 \begin_inset space ~
35093 \begin_inset space ~
35098 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35099 and then exported as text using the program
35104 \begin_layout Description
35109 PostScript format using the program
35114 \begin_layout Description
35115 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35116 source and also code in the statistical programming
35130 it is possible to use
35134 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35138 \begin_layout Standard
35139 If one of the menu entries
35146 \begin_inset space ~
35155 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35157 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35159 \begin_inset space ~
35163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35165 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35170 \begin_inset Index idx
35173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35174 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35183 \begin_layout Subsection
35187 \begin_layout Standard
35188 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35189 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35192 \begin_inset space ~
35196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35198 reference "sec:Paths"
35203 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35212 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35213 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35214 's preferences as described in section
35215 \begin_inset space ~
35219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35221 reference "subsec:Converters"
35228 \begin_layout Subsection
35229 New and Close Window
35232 \begin_layout Standard
35233 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35237 \begin_layout Subsection
35241 \begin_layout Standard
35242 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35245 \begin_layout Section
35247 \begin_inset Index idx
35250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35259 \begin_layout Subsection
35263 \begin_layout Standard
35264 Described in section
35265 \begin_inset space ~
35269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35271 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35278 \begin_layout Subsection
35279 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35282 \begin_layout Standard
35283 Described in section
35284 \begin_inset space ~
35288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35290 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35297 \begin_layout Subsection
35301 \begin_layout Standard
35302 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35303 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35306 \begin_layout Subsection
35310 \begin_layout Standard
35311 Selects the whole document.
35314 \begin_layout Subsection
35315 Find & Replace (Quick)
35318 \begin_layout Standard
35319 Described in section
35320 \begin_inset space ~
35324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35326 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35333 \begin_layout Subsection
35334 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35337 \begin_layout Standard
35338 Described in section
35339 \begin_inset space ~
35343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35345 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35352 \begin_layout Subsection
35353 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35356 \begin_layout Standard
35357 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35361 \begin_layout Subsection
35365 \begin_layout Standard
35366 Described in section
35367 \begin_inset space ~
35371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35373 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35380 \begin_layout Subsection
35382 \begin_inset Index idx
35385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35386 Paragraph ! Settings
35394 \begin_layout Standard
35395 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35396 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35400 \begin_layout Standard
35401 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35402 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35408 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35409 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35411 \begin_inset space ~
35419 \begin_layout Subsection
35423 \begin_layout Standard
35424 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35425 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35426 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35430 \begin_layout Standard
35431 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35433 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35434 The properties of tables are described in section
35435 \begin_inset space ~
35439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35441 reference "sec:Tables"
35445 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35446 \begin_inset space ~
35450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35452 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35459 \begin_layout Subsection
35460 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35463 \begin_layout Standard
35464 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35466 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35467 \begin_inset space ~
35471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35473 reference "sec:Nesting"
35478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35480 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35487 \begin_layout Subsection
35490 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35493 \begin_layout Standard
35494 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35495 nts of the same type.
35497 \begin_inset space ~
35501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35503 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35507 for an explanation.
35510 \begin_layout Section
35512 \begin_inset Index idx
35515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35524 \begin_layout Standard
35525 At the bottom of the
35529 menu the opened documents are listed.
35532 \begin_layout Subsection
35533 Open/Close all Insets
35536 \begin_layout Standard
35537 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35540 \begin_layout Subsection
35541 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35544 \begin_layout Standard
35545 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35548 \begin_layout Standard
35549 Math macros are described in the
35556 \begin_layout Subsection
35560 \begin_layout Standard
35561 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35562 \begin_inset space ~
35566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35568 reference "sec:Navigating"
35573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35575 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35582 \begin_layout Subsection
35586 \begin_layout Standard
35587 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35589 \begin_inset space ~
35593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35595 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35602 \begin_layout Subsection
35606 \begin_layout Standard
35607 Opens a window showing console messages.
35608 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35610 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35613 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35614 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35615 is processing the document.
35618 \begin_layout Subsection
35620 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35622 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35627 \begin_inset Index idx
35630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35639 \begin_layout Standard
35640 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35641 All toolbars and the
35644 \begin_inset space ~
35649 can be turned on and off.
35654 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35666 \begin_inset space ~
35678 \begin_inset space ~
35683 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35687 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35694 \begin_layout Standard
35699 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35703 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35704 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35705 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35706 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35707 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35710 \begin_layout Standard
35712 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35713 \begin_inset space ~
35717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35719 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35726 \begin_layout Subsection
35730 \begin_layout Standard
35734 \begin_inset space ~
35738 \begin_inset space ~
35742 \begin_inset space ~
35746 \begin_inset space ~
35750 \begin_inset space ~
35754 \begin_inset space ~
35759 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35760 's main window vertically while
35763 \begin_inset space ~
35767 \begin_inset space ~
35771 \begin_inset space ~
35775 \begin_inset space ~
35779 \begin_inset space ~
35783 \begin_inset space ~
35788 will split it horizontally.
35789 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35790 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35791 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35792 three or more documents at the same time.
35793 To close a split view, use the menu
35796 \begin_inset space ~
35800 \begin_inset space ~
35808 \begin_layout Subsection
35812 \begin_layout Standard
35813 Closes a split view.
35816 \begin_layout Subsection
35820 \begin_layout Standard
35821 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35822 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35823 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35824 's main window fullscreen.
35825 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35826 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35829 \begin_layout Section
35831 \begin_inset Index idx
35834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35843 \begin_layout Subsection
35847 \begin_layout Standard
35848 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35849 \begin_inset space ~
35853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35855 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35866 \begin_layout Subsection
35868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35870 name "subsec:Special-Character"
35877 \begin_layout Standard
35878 Here you can insert the following characters:
35881 \begin_layout Description
35886 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35889 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35890 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35891 -packages you have installed.
35892 You can get a complete display by checking
35895 \begin_inset space ~
35901 \begin_inset Newline newline
35905 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35913 Not all characters will be visible in the
35917 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35919 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35925 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
35929 ) can display every character.
35937 \begin_layout Description
35938 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
35942 \begin_layout Description
35944 \begin_inset space ~
35948 \begin_inset space ~
35951 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35952 \begin_inset space ~
35956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35958 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
35965 \begin_layout Description
35967 \begin_inset space ~
35970 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35973 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35974 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35980 \begin_layout Description
35982 \begin_inset space ~
35985 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35988 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35989 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35995 \begin_layout Description
35997 \begin_inset space ~
36000 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36004 \begin_layout Description
36006 \begin_inset space ~
36009 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36013 \begin_layout Description
36015 \begin_inset space ~
36018 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36024 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36030 \begin_layout Description
36032 \begin_inset space ~
36035 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36039 \begin_layout Description
36041 \begin_inset space ~
36045 \begin_inset Index idx
36048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36055 \begin_inset Index idx
36058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36059 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36064 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36065 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36067 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36073 \begin_inset Index idx
36076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36084 \begin_inset Newline newline
36087 More information about this feature can be found in the
36093 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36099 \begin_layout Description
36100 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
36102 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
36103 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
36107 \begin_layout Subsection
36111 \begin_layout Standard
36112 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36115 \begin_layout Description
36116 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36117 \begin_inset script superscript
36119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36128 \begin_layout Description
36129 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36130 \begin_inset script subscript
36132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36141 \begin_layout Description
36143 \begin_inset space ~
36146 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36147 \begin_inset space ~
36151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36153 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36160 \begin_layout Description
36162 \begin_inset space ~
36165 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36166 \begin_inset space ~
36170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36172 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36179 \begin_layout Description
36181 \begin_inset space ~
36184 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36185 \begin_inset space ~
36189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36191 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36198 \begin_layout Description
36200 \begin_inset space ~
36203 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36209 \begin_inset space \space{}
36212 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36213 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36222 To insert a fraction use the command
36227 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36231 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36240 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36247 \begin_layout Description
36249 \begin_inset space ~
36252 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36253 \begin_inset space ~
36257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36259 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36266 \begin_layout Description
36268 \begin_inset space ~
36271 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36272 \begin_inset space ~
36276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36278 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36285 \begin_layout Description
36287 \begin_inset space ~
36290 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36291 \begin_inset space ~
36295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36297 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36304 \begin_layout Description
36305 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36306 \begin_inset space ~
36310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36312 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36319 \begin_layout Description
36321 \begin_inset space ~
36324 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36325 \begin_inset space ~
36329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36331 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36338 \begin_layout Description
36340 \begin_inset space ~
36343 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36344 \begin_inset space ~
36348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36350 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36357 \begin_layout Description
36359 \begin_inset space ~
36363 \begin_inset space ~
36366 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36367 \begin_inset space ~
36371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36373 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36380 \begin_layout Description
36382 \begin_inset space ~
36385 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36386 as described in section
36387 \begin_inset space ~
36391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36393 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36400 \begin_layout Description
36402 \begin_inset space ~
36405 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36406 \begin_inset space ~
36410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36412 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36419 \begin_layout Description
36421 \begin_inset space ~
36424 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36425 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36427 \begin_inset space ~
36431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36433 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36440 \begin_layout Description
36442 \begin_inset space ~
36445 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36446 \begin_inset space ~
36450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36452 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36459 \begin_layout Description
36461 \begin_inset space ~
36465 \begin_inset space ~
36468 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36469 \begin_inset space ~
36473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36475 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36482 \begin_layout Subsection
36486 \begin_layout Standard
36487 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36491 \begin_inset space ~
36512 are described in section
36513 \begin_inset space ~
36517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36519 reference "sec:toc"
36528 is described in section
36529 \begin_inset space ~
36533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36535 reference "sec:Index"
36543 is described in section
36544 \begin_inset space ~
36548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36550 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36556 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36559 is described in section
36560 \begin_inset space ~
36564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36566 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36573 \begin_layout Subsection
36577 \begin_layout Standard
36578 To insert floats, as described in section
36579 \begin_inset space ~
36583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36585 reference "sec:Floats"
36589 and in detail the chapter
36596 \begin_inset space ~
36604 \begin_layout Subsection
36608 \begin_layout Standard
36609 To insert notes, described in section
36610 \begin_inset space ~
36614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36616 reference "sec:Notes"
36623 \begin_layout Subsection
36627 \begin_layout Standard
36628 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36630 Branches are described in section
36631 \begin_inset space ~
36635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36637 reference "sec:Branches"
36644 \begin_layout Subsection
36648 \begin_layout Standard
36649 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36650 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36652 An example is the document class
36653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36660 with three custom insets.
36663 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36667 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36673 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36676 \begin_layout Subsection
36678 \begin_inset Index idx
36681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36690 \begin_layout Standard
36691 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36693 For more information see chapter
36695 External Document Parts
36698 \begin_inset space ~
36704 \begin_layout Subsection
36706 \begin_inset Index idx
36709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36718 \begin_layout Standard
36719 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36720 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36727 \begin_inset space ~
36735 \begin_layout Subsection
36739 \begin_layout Standard
36744 dialog as described in section
36745 \begin_inset space ~
36749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36751 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36758 \begin_layout Subsection
36762 \begin_layout Standard
36767 as described in section
36768 \begin_inset space ~
36772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36774 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36781 \begin_layout Subsection
36785 \begin_layout Standard
36790 as described in section
36791 \begin_inset space ~
36795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36797 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36804 \begin_layout Subsection
36806 \begin_inset Index idx
36809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36816 \begin_inset Index idx
36819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36820 Longtables ! Caption
36828 \begin_layout Standard
36829 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36830 Floats are described in section
36831 \begin_inset space ~
36835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36837 reference "sec:Floats"
36841 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36848 \begin_inset space ~
36856 \begin_layout Subsection
36860 \begin_layout Standard
36861 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36862 \begin_inset space ~
36866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36868 reference "sec:Index"
36875 \begin_layout Subsection
36879 \begin_layout Standard
36880 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36881 \begin_inset space ~
36885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36887 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36894 \begin_layout Subsection
36898 \begin_layout Standard
36899 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36900 Tables are described in section
36901 \begin_inset space ~
36905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36907 reference "sec:Tables"
36911 and in detail in the chapter
36918 \begin_inset space ~
36926 \begin_layout Subsection
36930 \begin_layout Standard
36936 Graphics are described in section
36937 \begin_inset space ~
36941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36943 reference "sec:Graphics"
36950 \begin_layout Subsection
36954 \begin_layout Standard
36955 Inserts a URL as described in section
36956 \begin_inset space ~
36960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36962 reference "subsec:URLs"
36969 \begin_layout Subsection
36973 \begin_layout Standard
36974 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36975 \begin_inset space ~
36979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36981 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
36988 \begin_layout Subsection
36992 \begin_layout Standard
36993 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36994 \begin_inset space ~
36998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37000 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37007 \begin_layout Subsection
37011 \begin_layout Standard
37012 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37013 \begin_inset space ~
37017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37019 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37026 \begin_layout Subsection
37030 \begin_layout Standard
37031 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37032 title or caption of a float.
37033 Inserts a short title as described in section
37034 \begin_inset space ~
37038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37040 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37047 \begin_layout Subsection
37052 \begin_layout Standard
37053 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37054 Code box as described in section
37055 \begin_inset space ~
37059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37061 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37068 \begin_layout Subsection
37070 \begin_inset Index idx
37073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37082 \begin_layout Standard
37083 Inserts a program listings box.
37084 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37086 Program Code Listings
37091 \begin_inset space ~
37099 \begin_layout Subsection
37103 \begin_layout Standard
37104 Inserts the actual date.
37105 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37109 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37117 \begin_inset space ~
37125 \begin_layout Subsection
37129 \begin_layout Standard
37130 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37131 \begin_inset space ~
37135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37137 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37144 \begin_layout Section
37146 \begin_inset Index idx
37149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37158 \begin_layout Standard
37159 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37160 \begin_inset space ~
37163 of the current document.
37164 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37167 \begin_layout Subsection
37171 \begin_layout Standard
37172 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37173 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37174 to jump, for example, between section
37175 \begin_inset space ~
37179 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37180 \begin_inset space ~
37183 2.5 and use the submenu
37186 \begin_inset space ~
37190 \begin_inset space ~
37197 \begin_inset space ~
37203 \begin_inset space ~
37207 \begin_inset space ~
37213 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37217 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37223 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37226 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37229 \begin_layout Standard
37230 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37234 \begin_inset space ~
37239 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37242 \begin_inset space ~
37247 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37250 \begin_layout Subsection
37251 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37254 \begin_layout Standard
37255 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37259 \begin_layout Subsection
37263 \begin_layout Standard
37264 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37265 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37266 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37270 \begin_inset space ~
37274 \begin_inset space ~
37282 \begin_layout Subsection
37286 \begin_layout Standard
37287 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37290 The \SpecialChar LyX
37291 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37293 \begin_inset space ~
37301 \begin_inset space ~
37306 manual for a detailed description.
37309 \begin_layout Section
37311 \begin_inset Index idx
37314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37323 \begin_layout Subsection
37327 \begin_layout Standard
37328 Change Tracking is described in section
37329 \begin_inset space ~
37333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37335 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37342 \begin_layout Subsection
37350 \begin_layout Standard
37351 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37352 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37353 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37355 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37356 to the clipboard or update the view.
37357 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37361 \begin_layout Subsection
37362 Start Appendix Here
37365 \begin_layout Standard
37366 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37367 as described in section
37368 \begin_inset space ~
37372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37374 reference "sec:Appendices"
37381 \begin_layout Subsection
37383 \begin_inset space ~
37389 \begin_layout Standard
37390 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37391 default output format for the document (menu
37393 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37394 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37395 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37397 \begin_inset space ~
37401 \begin_inset space ~
37407 \begin_inset space ~
37411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37413 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37417 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37420 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37421 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37423 \begin_inset space ~
37426 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37428 \begin_inset space ~
37431 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37433 \begin_inset space ~
37437 \begin_inset space ~
37443 \begin_inset space ~
37447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37449 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37453 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37454 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37456 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37457 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37459 \begin_inset space ~
37462 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37464 \begin_inset space ~
37467 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37471 \begin_inset space ~
37475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37477 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37482 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37483 when it is first configured.
37484 The default output format is
37487 \begin_inset space ~
37495 \begin_layout Subsection
37496 View (Other Formats)
37499 \begin_layout Standard
37500 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37501 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37502 actual document with an external program.
37503 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37504 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37505 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37507 All possible formats are listed in section
37508 \begin_inset space ~
37512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37514 reference "subsec:Export"
37519 You should at least see the menu entry
37524 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37526 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37528 \begin_inset space ~
37532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37534 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37539 \begin_inset Index idx
37542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37543 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37552 \begin_layout Standard
37553 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37554 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37556 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37557 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37559 \begin_inset space ~
37562 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37564 \begin_inset space ~
37567 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37571 \begin_inset space ~
37575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37577 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37582 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37583 when it is first configured.
37586 \begin_layout Subsection
37588 \begin_inset space ~
37594 \begin_layout Standard
37595 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37596 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37599 \begin_layout Subsection
37600 Update (Other Formats)
37603 \begin_layout Standard
37604 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37605 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37608 \begin_layout Subsection
37609 View Master Document
37612 \begin_layout Standard
37613 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37629 \begin_inset space ~
37634 manual for more information on this topic).
37635 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37636 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37640 \begin_inset space ~
37644 \begin_inset space ~
37649 generates the output of the whole book, while
37653 will just output the chapter alone.
37656 \begin_layout Standard
37657 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37658 in the document settings (menu
37660 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37661 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37662 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37664 \begin_inset space ~
37668 \begin_inset space ~
37674 \begin_inset space ~
37678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37680 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37684 ) or in the preferences (menu
37686 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37687 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37689 \begin_inset space ~
37692 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37694 \begin_inset space ~
37697 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37699 \begin_inset space ~
37703 \begin_inset space ~
37709 \begin_inset space ~
37713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37715 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37722 \begin_layout Subsection
37723 Update Master Document
37726 \begin_layout Standard
37727 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37743 \begin_inset space ~
37748 manual for more information on this topic).
37749 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37750 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37753 \begin_layout Standard
37754 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37755 in the document settings (menu
37757 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37758 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37759 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37761 \begin_inset space ~
37765 \begin_inset space ~
37771 \begin_inset space ~
37775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37777 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37781 ) or in the preferences (menu
37783 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37784 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37786 \begin_inset space ~
37789 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37791 \begin_inset space ~
37794 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37796 \begin_inset space ~
37800 \begin_inset space ~
37806 \begin_inset space ~
37810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37812 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37819 \begin_layout Subsection
37821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37823 name "subsec:Compressed"
37830 \begin_layout Standard
37831 Un/compresses the current document.
37832 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
37833 compression (see the
37835 Additional Features
37837 manual for details).
37840 \begin_layout Subsection
37844 \begin_layout Standard
37845 The document settings are described in appendix
37846 \begin_inset space ~
37850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37852 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37859 \begin_layout Section
37861 \begin_inset Index idx
37864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37873 \begin_layout Subsection
37877 \begin_layout Standard
37878 Spell checking is explained in section
37879 \begin_inset space ~
37883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37885 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37892 \begin_layout Subsection
37896 \begin_layout Standard
37897 The thesaurus is described in section
37898 \begin_inset space ~
37902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37904 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37911 \begin_layout Subsection
37913 \begin_inset Index idx
37916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37923 \begin_inset Index idx
37926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37935 \begin_layout Standard
37936 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37937 the highlighted document part.
37940 \begin_layout Subsection
37946 \begin_inset Index idx
37949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37950 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37959 \begin_layout Standard
37960 Generates with the help of the program
37962 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37965 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
37966 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
37967 This feature is not available on Windows.
37970 \begin_layout Subsection
37976 \begin_inset Index idx
37979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37989 \begin_layout Standard
37990 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37995 \begin_inset space ~
38000 to see the full filename paths.
38003 \begin_layout Subsection
38005 \begin_inset Index idx
38008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38017 \begin_layout Standard
38018 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38019 files as described in section
38020 \begin_inset space ~
38024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38026 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38033 \begin_layout Subsection
38035 \begin_inset Index idx
38038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38051 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38069 \begin_inset Index idx
38072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38073 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38082 \begin_layout Standard
38083 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38084 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38085 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38086 -packages and programs it needs; see
38088 \begin_inset space ~
38092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38094 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38101 \begin_layout Subsection
38105 \begin_layout Standard
38110 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38111 \begin_inset space ~
38115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38117 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38124 \begin_layout Section
38126 \begin_inset Index idx
38129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38138 \begin_layout Standard
38139 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38140 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38142 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38146 \begin_layout Standard
38150 \begin_inset space ~
38155 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38156 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38157 packages and classes found
38158 by \SpecialChar LyX
38160 \begin_inset space ~
38164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38166 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38173 \begin_layout Standard
38177 \begin_inset space ~
38182 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38187 \begin_layout Section
38189 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38191 name "sec:Toolbars"
38198 \begin_layout Standard
38199 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38200 \begin_inset space ~
38204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38206 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38213 \begin_layout Standard
38214 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38215 This is described in the
38217 Additional Features
38222 \begin_layout Subsection
38224 \begin_inset Index idx
38227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38236 \begin_layout Standard
38237 \begin_inset Graphics
38238 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38246 \begin_layout Standard
38247 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38253 \begin_layout Standard
38254 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38271 \begin_inset Note Note
38274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38275 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38280 manual for more information.
38288 \begin_layout Standard
38289 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38295 \begin_layout Standard
38296 \begin_inset Tabular
38297 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38298 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38299 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38300 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38306 \begin_inset Graphics
38307 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38321 pull-down box for the environments
38334 \begin_layout Standard
38335 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38341 \begin_layout Standard
38343 \begin_inset Tabular
38344 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38345 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38346 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38347 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38348 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38371 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38378 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38401 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38408 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38431 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38438 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38447 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38461 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38468 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38477 arg "spelling-continuously"
38485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38489 Spellcheck continuously
38495 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38518 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38525 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38548 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38555 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38578 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38585 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38608 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38615 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38638 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38645 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38654 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38668 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38674 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38678 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38687 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38694 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38708 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38714 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38727 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38736 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38750 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38751 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38758 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38779 Emphasize text, function of the
38781 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38783 \begin_inset space ~
38786 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38795 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38816 Set text to noun style, function of the
38818 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38820 \begin_inset space ~
38823 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38832 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38841 arg "textstyle-apply"
38849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38853 Format text using the current settings in the
38855 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38857 \begin_inset space ~
38860 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38869 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38892 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38893 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
38895 \begin_inset space ~
38904 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38913 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38927 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38934 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38941 arg "tabular-insert"
38949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38955 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38962 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38971 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38983 Toggle outline window on/off,
38985 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38992 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39001 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39013 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39019 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39028 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39040 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39053 \begin_layout Subsection
39055 \begin_inset Index idx
39058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39067 \begin_layout Standard
39068 \begin_inset Graphics
39069 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39077 \begin_layout Standard
39078 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39084 \begin_layout Standard
39085 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39089 \begin_layout Standard
39090 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39096 \begin_layout Standard
39097 \begin_inset Tabular
39098 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39099 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39100 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39101 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39102 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39129 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39138 arg "layout Enumerate"
39146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39156 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39165 arg "layout Itemize"
39173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39183 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39210 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39219 arg "layout Description"
39227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39237 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39246 arg "depth-increment"
39254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39260 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39262 \begin_inset space ~
39266 \begin_inset space ~
39275 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39284 arg "depth-decrement"
39292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39298 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39300 \begin_inset space ~
39304 \begin_inset space ~
39313 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39322 arg "float-insert figure"
39330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39336 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39337 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39344 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39353 arg "float-insert table"
39361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39368 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39375 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39398 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39405 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39414 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39428 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39435 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39444 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39458 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39465 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39488 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39490 \begin_inset space ~
39499 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39508 arg "nomencl-insert"
39516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39522 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39524 \begin_inset space ~
39533 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39542 arg "footnote-insert"
39550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39556 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39563 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39572 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39586 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39588 \begin_inset space ~
39597 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39620 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39621 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39623 \begin_inset space ~
39632 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39641 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39662 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39685 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39692 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39715 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39717 \begin_inset space ~
39726 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39735 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39749 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39750 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39757 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39766 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39780 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39781 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39783 \begin_inset space ~
39792 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39801 arg "dialog-show character"
39809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39815 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39817 \begin_inset space ~
39820 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39827 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39836 arg "layout-paragraph"
39844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39850 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39852 \begin_inset space ~
39861 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39870 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39884 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39898 \begin_layout Subsection
39899 View/Update Toolbar
39900 \begin_inset Index idx
39903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39904 Toolbar ! View / Update
39912 \begin_layout Standard
39913 \begin_inset Graphics
39914 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39921 \begin_layout Standard
39922 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39928 \begin_layout Standard
39929 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39933 \begin_layout Standard
39934 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39940 \begin_layout Standard
39941 \begin_inset Tabular
39942 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39943 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39944 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39945 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39946 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39969 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39976 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39985 arg "buffer-update"
39993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39999 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40006 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40015 arg "master-buffer-view"
40023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40029 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40031 \begin_inset space ~
40040 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40049 arg "master-buffer-update"
40057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40063 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40065 \begin_inset space ~
40069 \begin_inset space ~
40078 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40087 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40102 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40103 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40104 Synchronize with Output
40110 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40133 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40134 View (Other Formats)
40140 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40147 arg "update-others"
40155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40161 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40162 Update (Other Formats)
40175 \begin_layout Standard
40176 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40180 \begin_layout Subsection
40184 \begin_layout Standard
40185 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40186 \begin_inset space ~
40190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40192 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40196 , the table toolbar
40197 \begin_inset Index idx
40200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40209 \begin_inset space ~
40214 manual and the math macro toolbar
40215 \begin_inset Index idx
40218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40231 \begin_layout Chapter
40232 The Document Settings
40233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40235 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40240 \begin_inset Index idx
40243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40244 Document ! Settings
40252 \begin_layout Standard
40256 \begin_inset space ~
40261 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40262 is called with the menu
40264 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40268 You can save your document settings as default with the
40270 Save as Document Defaults
40272 button in any dialog.
40273 This will create a template named
40277 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40278 when you create a new document without
40282 \begin_layout Standard
40287 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40288 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40291 \begin_layout Standard
40292 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40293 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40294 to find the one you are looking for.
40295 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40296 the submenus of the dialog.
40298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40302 \begin_inset space \space{}
40306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40313 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40314 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40315 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40318 \begin_layout Section
40322 \begin_layout Standard
40323 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40325 Document classes are described in section
40326 \begin_inset space ~
40330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40332 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40340 \begin_layout Standard
40344 \begin_inset space ~
40349 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40354 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40355 as a layout for a document class.
40356 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40358 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40367 \begin_layout Standard
40368 Some classes use special class options by default.
40369 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40373 and you can decide to use them or not.
40374 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40375 recommended you leave them untouched.
40380 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40381 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40386 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40388 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40394 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40395 \begin_inset Newline newline
40400 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40403 \begin_inset Newline newline
40406 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40407 distribution, see section
40412 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40414 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40426 \begin_layout Standard
40431 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40432 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40433 in the background if the child document
40434 is opened without its master.
40435 This way child documents are always compilable.
40436 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40443 \begin_inset space ~
40451 \begin_layout Standard
40452 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40463 \begin_inset Index idx
40466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40468 -packages ! prettyref
40474 \begin_inset Index idx
40477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40479 -packages ! refstyle
40484 for cross-references, see section
40485 \begin_inset space ~
40489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40491 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40498 \begin_layout Section
40502 \begin_layout Standard
40503 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40504 Please refer to the section
40507 \begin_inset space ~
40515 \begin_inset space ~
40520 manual for details.
40523 \begin_layout Section
40527 \begin_layout Standard
40528 Modules are explained in section
40529 \begin_inset space ~
40533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40535 reference "subsec:Modules"
40542 \begin_layout Section
40546 \begin_layout Standard
40548 \begin_inset space ~
40552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40554 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40561 \begin_layout Section
40565 \begin_layout Standard
40566 The document font settings are described in section
40567 \begin_inset space ~
40571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40573 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40580 \begin_layout Section
40584 \begin_layout Standard
40585 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40597 \begin_inset space ~
40602 and whether it should be a
40605 \begin_inset space ~
40610 can also be specified here.
40613 \begin_layout Standard
40614 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40615 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40616 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40618 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40621 \begin_layout Standard
40624 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40627 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40628 justifies the text on screen.
40629 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40633 \begin_layout Section
40637 \begin_layout Standard
40638 This dialog is described in sections
40639 \begin_inset space ~
40643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40645 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40652 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40659 \begin_layout Section
40663 \begin_layout Standard
40664 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40665 \begin_inset space ~
40669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40671 reference "subsec:Margins"
40678 \begin_layout Section
40680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40682 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40687 \begin_inset Index idx
40690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40691 Language ! Encoding
40699 \begin_layout Standard
40700 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40701 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40702 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40704 is always encoded in utf8).
40705 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40706 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40707 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40708 -command is not known for
40709 a particular character).
40712 \begin_layout Standard
40713 If you use the option
40718 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40719 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40720 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40722 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40723 exactly one encoding.
40724 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40727 \begin_layout Standard
40729 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40730 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40731 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40732 installation supports Unicode), choose
40733 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40734 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40735 is quite incomplete, so
40736 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40741 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40742 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40743 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40744 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40745 -commands is not used, because all
40746 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40747 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40748 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40749 , two new alternative engines
40750 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40752 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40754 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40757 \begin_inset space ~
40765 \begin_inset space ~
40773 \begin_inset space ~
40779 \begin_inset space ~
40783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40785 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40790 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40794 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40797 \begin_layout Standard
40801 \begin_inset space ~
40806 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40807 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40817 The possible settings are:
40820 \begin_layout Description
40821 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40823 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40824 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40828 \begin_inset space ~
40832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40834 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
40841 \begin_layout Description
40842 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40843 format you will use.
40844 In many cases this will be
40849 \begin_inset Index idx
40852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40860 If the newer package
40865 \begin_inset Index idx
40868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40870 -packages ! polyglossia
40875 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40876 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40877 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
40879 this package will be used instead of
40886 \begin_layout Description
40888 \begin_inset space ~
40899 would be more appropriate.
40902 \begin_layout Description
40903 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40904 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40908 (for German texts), type in
40911 \begin_inset Newline newline
40916 usepackage{ngerman}
40919 \begin_layout Description
40920 None will not use a language package.
40921 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40924 \begin_layout Standard
40925 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40928 \begin_layout Description
40930 \begin_inset space ~
40934 \begin_inset space ~
40938 \begin_inset space ~
40945 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40951 \begin_inset Index idx
40954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40956 -packages ! inputenc
40962 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40963 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40964 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
40968 \begin_layout Description
40969 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40971 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
40972 commands, which may result in a big
40973 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40974 -commands are needed.
40977 \begin_layout Description
40979 \begin_inset space ~
40983 \begin_inset space ~
40986 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40989 \begin_layout Description
40991 \begin_inset space ~
40995 \begin_inset space ~
40998 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41001 \begin_layout Description
41003 \begin_inset space ~
41006 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41009 \begin_layout Description
41011 \begin_inset space ~
41015 \begin_inset space ~
41018 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41019 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41022 \begin_layout Description
41024 \begin_inset space ~
41028 \begin_inset space ~
41031 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41035 \begin_layout Description
41037 \begin_inset space ~
41041 \begin_inset space ~
41044 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41045 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41048 \begin_layout Description
41050 \begin_inset space ~
41054 \begin_inset space ~
41058 \begin_inset space ~
41061 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41062 \begin_inset space ~
41068 \begin_layout Description
41070 \begin_inset space ~
41074 \begin_inset space ~
41078 \begin_inset space ~
41081 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41082 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41085 \begin_layout Description
41087 \begin_inset space ~
41091 \begin_inset space ~
41094 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41095 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41096 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41097 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41098 \begin_inset space ~
41102 \begin_inset space ~
41108 \begin_layout Description
41110 \begin_inset space ~
41114 \begin_inset space ~
41117 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41118 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41119 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41121 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41122 \begin_inset space ~
41126 \begin_inset space ~
41132 \begin_layout Description
41134 \begin_inset space ~
41138 \begin_inset space ~
41141 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41144 \begin_layout Description
41146 \begin_inset space ~
41150 \begin_inset space ~
41153 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41156 \begin_layout Description
41158 \begin_inset space ~
41162 \begin_inset space ~
41165 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41168 \begin_layout Description
41170 \begin_inset space ~
41173 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41176 \begin_layout Description
41178 \begin_inset space ~
41181 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41184 \begin_layout Description
41186 \begin_inset space ~
41190 \begin_inset space ~
41193 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41196 \begin_layout Description
41198 \begin_inset space ~
41202 \begin_inset space ~
41208 \begin_layout Description
41210 \begin_inset space ~
41214 \begin_inset space ~
41217 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41220 \begin_layout Description
41222 \begin_inset space ~
41226 \begin_inset space ~
41232 \begin_layout Description
41234 \begin_inset space ~
41238 \begin_inset space ~
41241 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41247 \begin_inset Index idx
41250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41257 , when using this, set the document language to
41262 \begin_layout Description
41264 \begin_inset space ~
41268 \begin_inset space ~
41271 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41276 , when using this, set the document language to
41279 \begin_inset space ~
41285 \begin_layout Description
41287 \begin_inset space ~
41291 \begin_inset space ~
41294 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41300 \begin_inset Index idx
41303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41305 -packages ! japanese
41310 , when using this, set the document language to
41315 \begin_layout Description
41317 \begin_inset space ~
41321 \begin_inset space ~
41324 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41329 , when using this, set the document language to
41334 \begin_layout Description
41336 \begin_inset space ~
41340 \begin_inset space ~
41343 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41348 , when using this, set the document language to
41353 \begin_layout Description
41355 \begin_inset space ~
41358 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41361 \begin_layout Description
41363 \begin_inset space ~
41367 \begin_inset space ~
41371 \begin_inset space ~
41374 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41377 \begin_layout Description
41379 \begin_inset space ~
41383 \begin_inset space ~
41387 \begin_inset space ~
41390 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41391 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41392 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41395 \begin_layout Description
41397 \begin_inset space ~
41401 \begin_inset space ~
41407 \begin_layout Description
41409 \begin_inset space ~
41413 \begin_inset space ~
41416 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41417 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41420 \begin_layout Description
41422 \begin_inset space ~
41426 \begin_inset space ~
41429 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41435 \begin_inset Index idx
41438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41445 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41448 \begin_layout Description
41450 \begin_inset space ~
41458 \begin_inset space ~
41461 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41468 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41471 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41478 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41479 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41481 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41484 \begin_layout Description
41486 \begin_inset space ~
41490 \begin_inset space ~
41493 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41499 \begin_inset Index idx
41502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41509 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41512 \begin_layout Description
41514 \begin_inset space ~
41517 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41523 \begin_inset Index idx
41526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41528 -packages ! inputenc
41534 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41538 \begin_layout Description
41540 \begin_inset space ~
41544 \begin_inset space ~
41548 \begin_inset space ~
41551 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41552 \begin_inset space ~
41558 \begin_layout Description
41560 \begin_inset space ~
41564 \begin_inset space ~
41568 \begin_inset space ~
41571 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41572 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41573 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41577 \begin_layout Description
41579 \begin_inset space ~
41583 \begin_inset space ~
41587 \begin_inset space ~
41590 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41591 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41594 \begin_layout Section
41596 \begin_inset Index idx
41599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41606 \begin_inset Index idx
41609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41616 \begin_inset Index idx
41619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41620 Color ! Shaded boxes
41626 \begin_inset Index idx
41629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41630 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41638 \begin_layout Standard
41639 Here you can alter the font color for the
41643 (default: black), for
41646 \begin_inset space ~
41651 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41655 (default: white) and for
41658 \begin_inset space ~
41668 sets the color back to the default.
41671 \begin_layout Standard
41672 Clicking any button showing
41680 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41681 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41682 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41683 later more quickly.
41686 \begin_layout Standard
41687 Note, if you change the
41690 \begin_inset space ~
41695 font color and use the option
41698 \begin_inset space ~
41703 in the document settings under
41706 \begin_inset space ~
41711 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41712 \begin_inset space ~
41716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41718 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41725 \begin_layout Standard
41726 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41732 \begin_layout Standard
41736 \begin_inset space ~
41745 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41748 \begin_inset space ~
41751 Code after a forced page break:
41754 \begin_layout Itemize
41755 For the page color:
41756 \begin_inset Newline newline
41763 pagecolor{color name}
41766 \begin_layout Itemize
41767 For the text color:
41768 \begin_inset Newline newline
41778 \begin_layout Standard
41779 You are restricted to one of
41815 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41822 \begin_inset space ~
41828 \begin_inset Newline newline
41831 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41832 names to refer to them:
41835 \begin_layout Itemize
41841 \begin_inset Newline newline
41846 page_backgroundcolor
41849 \begin_layout Itemize
41853 \begin_inset space ~
41859 \begin_inset Newline newline
41867 \begin_layout Itemize
41871 \begin_inset space ~
41877 \begin_inset Newline newline
41885 \begin_layout Itemize
41889 \begin_inset space ~
41895 \begin_inset Newline newline
41903 \begin_layout Standard
41904 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41907 \begin_inset space ~
41915 \begin_inset space ~
41923 \begin_layout Section
41927 \begin_layout Standard
41928 Here you can adjust the
41932 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41936 as described in section
41937 \begin_inset space ~
41941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41943 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41950 \begin_layout Section
41954 \begin_layout Standard
41955 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41961 \begin_inset Index idx
41964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41976 \begin_inset Index idx
41979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41981 -packages ! jurabib
41989 Sectioned bibliography
41991 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41997 \begin_inset Index idx
42000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42002 -packages ! bibtopic
42007 and you can select a
42011 for the generation of the bibliography.
42012 For a further description see section
42013 \begin_inset space ~
42017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42019 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42026 \begin_layout Section
42030 \begin_layout Standard
42031 Here you can define the
42035 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42037 \begin_inset space ~
42041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42043 reference "sec:Index"
42050 \begin_layout Section
42054 \begin_layout Standard
42055 The PDF properties are explained in section
42056 \begin_inset space ~
42060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42062 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42069 \begin_layout Section
42073 \begin_layout Standard
42074 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42075 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42081 \begin_inset Index idx
42084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42086 -packages ! amsmath
42096 \begin_inset Index idx
42099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42101 -packages ! amssymb
42111 \begin_inset Index idx
42114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42126 \begin_inset Index idx
42129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42141 \begin_inset Index idx
42144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42146 -packages ! mathdots
42156 \begin_inset Index idx
42159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42161 -packages ! mathtools
42171 \begin_inset Index idx
42174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42186 \begin_inset Index idx
42189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42191 -packages ! stackrel
42201 \begin_inset Index idx
42204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42206 -packages ! stmaryrd
42216 \begin_inset Index idx
42219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42221 -packages ! undertilde
42226 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42229 \begin_layout Description
42230 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42231 -errors in formulas,
42232 ensure that you have this enabled.
42235 \begin_layout Description
42236 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42237 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42238 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42242 \begin_layout Description
42243 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42246 \begin_inset space ~
42258 \begin_layout Description
42259 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42262 \begin_inset space ~
42274 \begin_layout Description
42275 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42286 \begin_layout Description
42287 mathtools is used for the math commands
42323 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42330 \begin_layout Description
42331 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42333 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42342 \begin_layout Description
42343 stackrel is used for the math command
42360 \begin_layout Description
42361 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42364 \begin_layout Description
42365 undertilde is used for the math command
42373 Accents for one Character
42382 \begin_layout Section
42386 \begin_layout Standard
42387 The float placement options are described in the section
42390 \begin_inset space ~
42398 \begin_inset space ~
42406 \begin_layout Section
42410 \begin_layout Standard
42411 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42413 Program Code Listings
42418 \begin_inset space ~
42426 \begin_layout Section
42430 \begin_layout Standard
42431 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42439 set to be used and set the
42444 The itemize environment is described in section
42445 \begin_inset space ~
42449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42451 reference "sec:Itemize"
42458 \begin_layout Standard
42459 You can furthermore specify a
42462 \begin_inset space ~
42467 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42468 command of the desired character.
42469 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42476 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42478 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42482 \begin_inset space \space{}
42486 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42496 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42497 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42500 \begin_layout Standard
42501 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42509 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42510 -packages in the preamble (menu
42513 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42514 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42517 \begin_inset space ~
42523 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42527 usepackage{textcomp}
42530 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42534 usepackage{amssymb}
42544 \begin_layout Section
42548 \begin_layout Standard
42549 Branches are described in section
42550 \begin_inset space ~
42554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42556 reference "sec:Branches"
42563 \begin_layout Section
42565 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42567 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42574 \begin_layout Standard
42575 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42578 \begin_layout Description
42580 \begin_inset space ~
42584 \begin_inset space ~
42587 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42607 View Master Document
42608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42615 Update Master Document
42616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42623 menu or the toolbar.
42624 The default is set in
42626 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42627 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42629 \begin_inset space ~
42632 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42636 \begin_inset space ~
42640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42642 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42649 \begin_layout Description
42651 \begin_inset space ~
42655 \begin_inset space ~
42658 Output settings for the menu
42660 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42662 \begin_inset space ~
42668 For a detailed description see section
42670 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42675 \begin_inset space ~
42683 \begin_layout Description
42685 \begin_inset space ~
42689 \begin_inset space ~
42692 Options offers settings for the export format
42700 \begin_inset space ~
42705 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42706 \begin_inset space ~
42709 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42713 \begin_inset space ~
42718 settings are described in detail in section
42720 Math Output in XHTML
42725 \begin_inset space ~
42734 \begin_inset space ~
42738 \begin_inset space ~
42743 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42746 \begin_layout Section
42754 \begin_layout Standard
42755 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42757 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42759 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42761 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42765 \begin_layout Standard
42766 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42767 -syntax is given in section
42768 \begin_inset space ~
42772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42774 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42781 \begin_layout Chapter
42787 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42789 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42794 \begin_inset Index idx
42797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42806 \begin_layout Standard
42807 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42809 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42813 It has the following submenus.
42816 \begin_layout Section
42820 \begin_layout Subsection
42824 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42825 User Interface File
42826 \begin_inset Index idx
42829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42830 Customization ! of toolbars
42836 \begin_inset Index idx
42839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42840 Customization ! of menus
42848 \begin_layout Standard
42849 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42850 interface (ui) file.
42851 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42859 \begin_layout Description
42864 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42867 \begin_layout Description
42874 the menu entries in popup context menus
42877 \begin_layout Description
42882 specifies the toolbar buttons
42885 \begin_layout Standard
42886 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42887 and edit the entries.
42890 \begin_layout Standard
42891 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42903 entries must be finished with an explicit
42928 and in the case of the
42929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42941 The syntax for the entries is:
42944 \begin_layout Standard
42945 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42974 \begin_layout Standard
42976 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42979 All the \SpecialChar LyX
42980 -functions are listed in the menu
42982 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42984 \begin_inset space ~
42992 \begin_layout Standard
42993 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42999 \begin_layout Standard
43000 For example, assuming you use the menu
43002 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43005 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43009 \begin_layout Standard
43010 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43034 \begin_layout Standard
43036 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43051 to have the sixth bookmark.
43054 \begin_layout Standard
43058 \begin_inset space ~
43063 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43064 's toolbar buttons.
43065 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43066 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43069 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43076 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43080 \begin_layout Standard
43083 Enable tool tips in main work area
43085 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43089 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43093 \begin_layout Standard
43098 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43099 should display in the menu
43101 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43103 \begin_inset space ~
43111 \begin_layout Subsection
43115 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43119 \begin_layout Standard
43122 Restore window layouts and geometries
43125 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43126 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43130 \begin_layout Standard
43133 Restore cursor positions
43135 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43139 \begin_layout Standard
43142 Load opened files from last session
43144 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43148 \begin_layout Standard
43151 Clear all session information
43153 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43154 sessions (cursor positions, names
43155 of last opened documents, etc.).
43158 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43162 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43167 \begin_inset Index idx
43170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43179 \begin_layout Standard
43182 Backup original documents when saving
43184 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43185 it was saved the last time.
43186 It is stored in the
43189 \begin_inset space ~
43195 \begin_inset space ~
43199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43201 reference "sec:Paths"
43205 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43208 \begin_inset space ~
43214 The backup file has the file extension
43215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43229 \begin_layout Standard
43232 Backup documents, every
43234 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43237 \begin_layout Standard
43240 Save documents compressed by default
43242 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43243 \begin_inset space ~
43247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43249 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43254 This applies to newly created documents only.
43255 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43259 Windows & work area
43262 \begin_layout Standard
43265 Open documents in tabs
43267 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43271 \begin_layout Standard
43276 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43289 reference "sec:Paths"
43293 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43300 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43301 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43302 of \SpecialChar LyX
43304 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43305 instance is created for each file.
43308 \begin_layout Standard
43311 Single close-tab button
43313 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43323 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43324 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43327 \begin_layout Standard
43328 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43336 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43337 before the change takes effect.
43345 \begin_layout Standard
43350 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43352 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43354 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43358 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43359 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43360 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43363 \begin_layout Subsection
43365 \begin_inset Index idx
43368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43377 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43384 \begin_layout Standard
43385 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43389 \begin_layout Standard
43390 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43398 This section only deals with the fonts
43402 the \SpecialChar LyX
43404 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43407 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43408 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43419 \begin_layout Standard
43420 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43437 (depends on the system) as its
43440 \begin_inset space ~
43456 \begin_layout Standard
43457 You can change the font size with the
43464 \begin_layout Standard
43469 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43474 points have the size of 1
43475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43479 \begin_inset space ~
43483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43485 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43490 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43495 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43496 \begin_inset space ~
43500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43502 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43509 \begin_layout Standard
43512 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43514 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43515 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43516 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43517 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43518 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43520 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43521 \begin_inset space ~
43527 \begin_layout Subsection
43529 \begin_inset Index idx
43532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43533 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43540 \begin_inset Index idx
43543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43552 \begin_layout Standard
43553 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43554 by choosing an item in the
43555 list and selecting the
43562 \begin_layout Standard
43563 By checking the option
43567 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43570 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43571 \begin_inset space ~
43575 \begin_inset space ~
43580 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43583 \begin_layout Subsection
43585 \begin_inset Index idx
43588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43597 \begin_layout Standard
43598 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43602 \begin_layout Standard
43607 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43608 This feature is described in section
43609 \begin_inset space ~
43613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43615 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43622 \begin_layout Standard
43623 Checking the option
43626 \begin_inset space ~
43630 \begin_inset space ~
43634 \begin_inset space ~
43639 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43642 \begin_layout Section
43644 \begin_inset Index idx
43647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43656 \begin_layout Subsection
43660 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43664 \begin_layout Standard
43667 Cursor follows scrollbar
43669 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43673 \begin_layout Standard
43674 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43675 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43676 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43679 \begin_layout Standard
43682 Scroll below end of document
43684 is self-explanatory.
43687 \begin_layout Standard
43688 In \SpecialChar LyX
43689 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43696 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43698 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43699 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43702 \begin_layout Standard
43705 Sort environments alphabetically
43707 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43710 \begin_layout Standard
43713 Group environments by their category
43715 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43718 \begin_layout Standard
43723 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43734 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43738 \begin_layout Standard
43739 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43744 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43745 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43749 \begin_layout Subsection
43751 \begin_inset Index idx
43754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43761 \begin_inset Index idx
43764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43765 Settings ! Shortcuts
43773 \begin_layout Standard
43778 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43780 Several binding files are available, among them:
43783 \begin_layout Description
43784 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43787 \begin_layout Description
43788 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43800 \begin_layout Description
43801 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43804 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43812 \begin_layout Standard
43813 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43818 , and binding files for special languages.
43819 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43820 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43824 \begin_inset space \space{}
43828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43836 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43837 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43838 will try to use the appropriate binding
43842 \begin_layout Standard
43843 Some binding files, like
43847 , only have a limited scope.
43848 When looking at the end of the file
43852 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43855 \begin_layout Standard
43859 \begin_inset space ~
43863 \begin_inset space ~
43868 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43869 in the selected key binding file.
43872 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43876 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
43881 \begin_inset Index idx
43884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43885 Key Bindings ! Editing
43893 \begin_layout Standard
43894 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43895 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
43896 functions and the bound shortcuts.
43897 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43900 Show key-bindings containing
43903 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43904 Insert there for example as keyword
43905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43912 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43913 functions that contain
43914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43922 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43923 All \SpecialChar LyX
43924 functions are also listed in the file
43929 that you will find in the
43936 \begin_layout Standard
43937 For example, to add the shortcut
43945 , select the function and press the
43950 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43951 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43954 \begin_layout Standard
43955 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43956 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
43958 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
43959 function names as a semicolon separated list.
43961 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43966 \begin_layout Standard
43967 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43970 \begin_layout Standard
43971 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43973 The syntax of the entries is:
43976 \begin_layout Standard
43982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44001 \begin_layout Subsection
44003 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44005 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44010 \begin_inset Index idx
44013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44020 \begin_inset Index idx
44023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44024 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44032 \begin_layout Standard
44033 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44034 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44035 provides keyboard maps.
44036 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44037 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44040 \begin_inset space ~
44044 \begin_inset space ~
44049 and select the keyboard map file named
44056 \begin_layout Standard
44065 keyboard map and, if you use the
44069 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44072 arg "keymap-primary"
44078 arg "keymap-secondary"
44081 respectively or toggle between them with
44084 arg "keymap-toggle"
44090 \begin_layout Standard
44091 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44099 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44108 \begin_layout Standard
44109 You can also specify the mouse
44111 Wheel scrolling speed
44114 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44118 \begin_layout Standard
44126 \begin_inset space ~
44130 \begin_inset space ~
44135 you can select a key for zooming.
44136 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44139 \begin_layout Subsection
44143 \begin_layout Standard
44144 Input completion is described in section
44145 \begin_inset space ~
44149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44151 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44158 \begin_layout Section
44160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44167 \begin_inset Index idx
44170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44177 \begin_inset Index idx
44180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44189 \begin_layout Standard
44190 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44191 are normally determined during
44193 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44196 \begin_layout Description
44198 \begin_inset space ~
44201 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44202 's working directory.
44203 It is the default when you
44214 \begin_inset space ~
44222 \begin_layout Description
44224 \begin_inset space ~
44227 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44229 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44231 \begin_inset space ~
44235 \begin_inset space ~
44243 \begin_layout Description
44245 \begin_inset space ~
44248 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44254 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44258 \begin_inset Newline newline
44262 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44274 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44275 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44283 \begin_layout Description
44285 \begin_inset space ~
44289 \begin_inset Index idx
44292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44298 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44299 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44300 \begin_inset space ~
44304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44306 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44314 will be used to save the backups.
44315 \begin_inset Newline newline
44318 Backup files have the ending
44319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44329 \begin_layout Description
44331 \begin_inset space ~
44334 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44335 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44337 \begin_inset Newline newline
44344 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44350 You can edit this file with the program
44359 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44360 in its preferences under
44363 \begin_inset space ~
44369 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44374 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44376 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44377 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44383 and \SpecialChar LyX
44384 need to be running the same time.
44385 \begin_inset Newline newline
44388 The pipe is also used for the
44393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44399 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44404 \begin_inset Newline newline
44407 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44408 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44409 \begin_inset Newline newline
44425 \begin_layout Description
44427 \begin_inset space ~
44430 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44433 \begin_layout Description
44435 \begin_inset space ~
44438 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44439 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44440 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44443 \begin_layout Description
44445 \begin_inset space ~
44448 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44454 You only need to specify it if you are using
44458 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44460 For \SpecialChar LyX
44465 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44469 \begin_layout Description
44471 \begin_inset space ~
44474 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44475 When \SpecialChar LyX
44476 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44477 to find it on the system.
44478 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44480 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44489 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44490 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44493 \begin_layout Description
44495 \begin_inset space ~
44498 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44499 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44500 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44501 code or in the document
44503 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44505 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44506 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44507 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44508 scanned for the input files.
44509 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44510 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44512 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44513 compilation may fail for some documents.
44516 \begin_layout Section
44520 \begin_layout Standard
44521 Here you can insert your
44530 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44532 \begin_inset space ~
44536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44538 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44542 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44545 \begin_layout Section
44547 \begin_inset Index idx
44550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44551 Language ! Settings
44557 \begin_inset Index idx
44560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44561 Settings ! Language
44569 \begin_layout Subsection
44571 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44573 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44580 \begin_layout Description
44582 \begin_inset space ~
44586 \begin_inset space ~
44589 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44591 You can find its actual translation status here:
44592 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44594 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44601 \begin_layout Description
44603 \begin_inset space ~
44606 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44607 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44608 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44609 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44626 The most widespread language package is
44631 \begin_inset Index idx
44634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44641 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44643 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44644 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44645 come with the alternative
44651 \begin_inset Index idx
44654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44656 -packages ! polyglossia
44661 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44662 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44668 The available selections are described in section
44669 \begin_inset space ~
44673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44675 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44682 \begin_layout Description
44684 \begin_inset space ~
44687 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44688 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44689 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44690 An example is the start command
44696 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44698 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44702 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44717 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44722 \begin_layout Description
44724 \begin_inset space ~
44732 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44733 command toggles the package on and off.
44736 \begin_layout Description
44738 \begin_inset space ~
44742 \begin_inset space ~
44745 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44749 \begin_layout Description
44751 \begin_inset space ~
44755 \begin_inset space ~
44758 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44762 \begin_layout Description
44764 \begin_inset space ~
44768 \begin_inset space ~
44771 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44772 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44773 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44775 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44782 \begin_layout Description
44784 \begin_inset space ~
44787 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44789 When this option is not set, the
44792 \begin_inset space ~
44797 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44799 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44802 \begin_inset space ~
44810 \begin_layout Description
44812 \begin_inset space ~
44818 \begin_inset space ~
44824 When it is not set, the
44827 \begin_inset space ~
44832 is set to the end of the document.
44835 \begin_layout Description
44837 \begin_inset space ~
44841 \begin_inset space ~
44844 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44845 language will be underlined in blue.
44848 \begin_layout Description
44850 \begin_inset space ~
44854 \begin_inset space ~
44857 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44858 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44861 \begin_layout Description
44863 \begin_inset space ~
44866 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44867 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44868 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44869 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44872 \begin_layout Subsection
44876 \begin_layout Standard
44877 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44878 \begin_inset space ~
44882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44884 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44891 \begin_layout Section
44895 \begin_layout Subsection
44899 \begin_layout Description
44901 \begin_inset space ~
44905 \begin_inset space ~
44908 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44911 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44912 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
44914 \begin_inset space ~
44920 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44923 \begin_layout Description
44925 \begin_inset space ~
44929 \begin_inset Index idx
44932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44939 \begin_inset Index idx
44942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44943 Settings ! Date format
44948 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44949 \begin_inset Newline newline
44953 \begin_inset Flex URL
44956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44958 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
44964 \begin_inset Newline newline
44967 For example the format
44968 \begin_inset Newline newline
44972 \begin_inset Newline newline
44975 prints the date as day/month/year.
44978 \begin_layout Description
44980 \begin_inset space ~
44984 \begin_inset space ~
44987 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
44988 is allowed to overwrite on export.
44991 \begin_layout Description
44993 \begin_inset space ~
44996 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44998 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45000 \begin_inset space ~
45006 For a detailed description see section
45008 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45013 \begin_inset space ~
45021 \begin_layout Subsection
45027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45029 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45034 \begin_inset Index idx
45037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45038 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45047 \begin_layout Description
45049 \begin_inset space ~
45057 \begin_inset space ~
45061 \begin_inset space ~
45064 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45069 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45090 are used for Cyrillic.
45091 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45104 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45106 sets up in the background.
45107 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45110 \begin_layout Description
45112 \begin_inset space ~
45116 \begin_inset space ~
45119 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
45124 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45128 \begin_layout Description
45130 \begin_inset space ~
45134 \begin_inset space ~
45138 \begin_inset space ~
45142 \begin_inset space ~
45145 options They only have an effect when the program
45149 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45152 \begin_layout Standard
45153 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45154 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45155 manuals of the applications.
45158 \begin_layout Description
45160 \begin_inset space ~
45163 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45164 \begin_inset space ~
45168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45170 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45177 \begin_layout Description
45179 \begin_inset space ~
45182 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45183 \begin_inset space ~
45187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45189 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45196 \begin_layout Description
45198 \begin_inset space ~
45201 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45202 \begin_inset space ~
45206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45208 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45215 \begin_layout Description
45221 \begin_inset space ~
45224 command Command for the program
45226 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45229 that is described in the section
45231 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45236 Additional Features
45241 \begin_layout Standard
45242 There are additionally the following options:
45245 \begin_layout Description
45247 \begin_inset space ~
45251 \begin_inset space ~
45255 \begin_inset space ~
45259 \begin_inset space ~
45264 \begin_inset space ~
45267 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45285 to separate folders.
45286 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45288 \begin_inset Index idx
45291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45298 \begin_inset Index idx
45301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45310 \begin_layout Description
45312 \begin_inset space ~
45316 \begin_inset space ~
45320 \begin_inset space ~
45324 \begin_inset space ~
45328 \begin_inset space ~
45332 \begin_inset space ~
45335 changes Removes all manually set
45341 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45342 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45344 \begin_inset space ~
45349 dialog when changing the document class.
45352 \begin_layout Section
45354 \begin_inset space ~
45358 \begin_inset Index idx
45361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45370 \begin_layout Subsection
45372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45374 name "subsec:Converters"
45379 \begin_inset Index idx
45382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45391 \begin_layout Standard
45392 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45393 from one format to another.
45394 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45395 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45402 \begin_inset space ~
45407 field and press the
45412 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45416 \begin_inset space ~
45421 drop-down list, modify the
45425 field and press the
45432 \begin_layout Standard
45435 Converter File Cache
45441 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45443 Maximum Age (in days
45446 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45447 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45450 \begin_layout Standard
45451 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45452 definition, is described in the section
45463 \begin_layout Subsection
45465 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45467 name "sec:File-Formats"
45472 \begin_inset Index idx
45475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45482 \begin_inset Index idx
45485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45494 \begin_layout Standard
45495 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45505 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45508 \begin_layout Standard
45509 You can also define the
45511 Default output format
45513 that is used when you use
45515 View, Update, View Master Document
45519 Update Master Document
45525 menu or the toolbar.
45528 \begin_layout Standard
45529 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45540 \begin_layout Standard
45541 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45543 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45544 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45545 This is done by specifying a
45550 More about this is described in the section
45561 \begin_layout Chapter
45562 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45564 \begin_inset Index idx
45567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45574 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45576 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45583 \begin_layout Standard
45585 \begin_inset space ~
45589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45591 reference "tab:Units"
45595 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45596 and used in this documentation.
45599 \begin_layout Standard
45600 \begin_inset Float table
45606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45607 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45610 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45625 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45633 \begin_inset Tabular
45634 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45635 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45636 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45637 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45638 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45771 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45808 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45844 scaled point (65536
45845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45849 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45882 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45886 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45919 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45923 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45927 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45996 % of original image width
46001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46312 \begin_layout Chapter
46314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46316 name "chap:Credits"
46323 \begin_layout Standard
46324 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46325 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46328 \begin_layout Itemize
46331 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46334 \begin_layout Itemize
46340 \begin_layout Itemize
46346 \begin_layout Itemize
46352 \begin_layout Itemize
46358 \begin_layout Itemize
46364 \begin_layout Itemize
46370 \begin_layout Itemize
46376 \begin_layout Itemize
46379 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46382 \begin_layout Itemize
46388 \begin_layout Itemize
46394 \begin_layout Itemize
46400 \begin_layout Itemize
46406 \begin_layout Itemize
46412 \begin_layout Itemize
46418 \begin_layout Itemize
46424 \begin_layout Itemize
46430 \begin_layout Itemize
46431 The \SpecialChar LyX
46433 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46442 \begin_layout Standard
46443 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46446 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46453 \begin_layout Bibliography
46454 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46455 LatexCommand bibitem
46461 The \SpecialChar LyX
46463 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46466 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46471 \begin_inset Newline newline
46475 \begin_inset Flex URL
46478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46480 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46488 \begin_layout Bibliography
46489 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46490 LatexCommand bibitem
46491 key "latexcompanion"
46495 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46497 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46498 Companion Second Edition.
46501 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46504 \begin_layout Bibliography
46505 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46506 LatexCommand bibitem
46511 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46514 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46518 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46521 \begin_layout Bibliography
46522 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46523 LatexCommand bibitem
46531 : A Document Preparation System.
46534 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46537 \begin_layout Bibliography
46538 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46539 LatexCommand bibitem
46548 The \SpecialChar TeX
46552 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46555 \begin_layout Bibliography
46556 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46557 LatexCommand bibitem
46562 The \SpecialChar TeX
46564 \begin_inset Newline newline
46568 \begin_inset Flex URL
46571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46573 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46581 \begin_layout Bibliography
46582 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46583 LatexCommand bibitem
46588 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46590 \begin_inset Newline newline
46594 \begin_inset Flex URL
46597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46599 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46607 \begin_layout Bibliography
46608 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46609 LatexCommand bibitem
46615 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46617 name "Documentation"
46618 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46624 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46628 \begin_inset Newline newline
46632 \begin_inset Flex URL
46635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46637 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46645 \begin_layout Bibliography
46646 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46647 LatexCommand bibitem
46653 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46655 name "Documentation"
46656 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46660 how to use the program
46662 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46666 \begin_inset Newline newline
46670 \begin_inset Flex URL
46673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46675 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46683 \begin_layout Bibliography
46684 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46685 LatexCommand bibitem
46691 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46693 name "Documentation"
46694 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46703 \begin_inset Newline newline
46707 \begin_inset Flex URL
46710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46712 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46720 \begin_layout Bibliography
46721 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46722 LatexCommand bibitem
46723 key "makeindex-man"
46728 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46731 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
46740 \begin_inset Newline newline
46744 \begin_inset Flex URL
46747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46749 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
46757 \begin_layout Bibliography
46758 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46759 LatexCommand bibitem
46765 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46767 name "Documentation"
46768 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46777 \begin_inset Newline newline
46781 \begin_inset Flex URL
46784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46786 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46794 \begin_layout Bibliography
46795 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46796 LatexCommand bibitem
46802 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46804 name "Documentation"
46805 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46809 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46811 \begin_inset Newline newline
46815 \begin_inset Flex URL
46818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46820 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46828 \begin_layout Bibliography
46829 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46830 LatexCommand bibitem
46836 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46838 name "Documentation"
46839 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46843 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46849 \begin_inset Index idx
46852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46854 -packages ! caption
46860 \begin_inset Newline newline
46864 \begin_inset Flex URL
46867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46869 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46877 \begin_layout Bibliography
46878 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46879 LatexCommand bibitem
46885 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46887 name "Documentation"
46888 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46892 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46898 \begin_inset Index idx
46901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46903 -packages ! enumitem
46909 \begin_inset Newline newline
46913 \begin_inset Flex URL
46916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46918 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46926 \begin_layout Bibliography
46927 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46928 LatexCommand bibitem
46934 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46936 name "Documentation"
46937 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46941 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46947 \begin_inset Index idx
46950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46952 -packages ! fancyhdr
46958 \begin_inset Newline newline
46962 \begin_inset Flex URL
46965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46967 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46975 \begin_layout Bibliography
46976 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46977 LatexCommand bibitem
46983 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46985 name "Documentation"
46986 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46990 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46996 \begin_inset Index idx
46999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47001 -packages ! hyperref
47007 \begin_inset Newline newline
47011 \begin_inset Flex URL
47014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47016 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47024 \begin_layout Bibliography
47025 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47026 LatexCommand bibitem
47032 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47034 name "Documentation"
47035 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47039 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47045 \begin_inset Index idx
47048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47050 -packages ! nomencl
47056 \begin_inset Newline newline
47060 \begin_inset Flex URL
47063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47065 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47073 \begin_layout Bibliography
47074 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47075 LatexCommand bibitem
47081 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47083 name "Documentation"
47084 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47088 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47094 \begin_inset Index idx
47097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47099 -packages ! prettyref
47105 \begin_inset Newline newline
47109 \begin_inset Flex URL
47112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47114 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47122 \begin_layout Bibliography
47123 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47124 LatexCommand bibitem
47130 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47132 name "Documentation"
47133 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47137 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47143 \begin_inset Index idx
47146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47148 -packages ! refstyle
47154 \begin_inset Newline newline
47158 \begin_inset Flex URL
47161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47163 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47171 \begin_layout Bibliography
47172 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47173 LatexCommand bibitem
47179 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47182 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47186 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47188 \begin_inset Newline newline
47192 \begin_inset Flex URL
47195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47197 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47205 \begin_layout Bibliography
47206 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47207 LatexCommand bibitem
47213 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47216 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47220 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47222 \begin_inset Newline newline
47226 \begin_inset Flex URL
47229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47231 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47239 \begin_layout Bibliography
47240 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47241 LatexCommand bibitem
47247 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47250 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47254 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47255 for Cyrillic languages:
47256 \begin_inset Newline newline
47260 \begin_inset Flex URL
47263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47265 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47273 \begin_layout Bibliography
47274 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47275 LatexCommand bibitem
47281 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47284 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47288 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47290 \begin_inset Newline newline
47294 \begin_inset Flex URL
47297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47299 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47307 \begin_layout Bibliography
47308 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47309 LatexCommand bibitem
47315 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47318 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47322 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47324 \begin_inset Newline newline
47328 \begin_inset Flex URL
47331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47333 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47341 \begin_layout Bibliography
47342 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47343 LatexCommand bibitem
47349 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47352 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47356 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47358 \begin_inset Newline newline
47362 \begin_inset Flex URL
47365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47367 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47375 \begin_layout Bibliography
47376 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47377 LatexCommand bibitem
47383 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47386 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47390 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47392 \begin_inset Newline newline
47396 \begin_inset Flex URL
47399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47401 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47409 \begin_layout Bibliography
47410 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47411 LatexCommand bibitem
47417 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47420 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47424 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47426 \begin_inset Newline newline
47430 \begin_inset Flex URL
47433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47435 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47443 \begin_layout Bibliography
47444 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47445 LatexCommand bibitem
47451 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47454 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47458 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47460 \begin_inset Newline newline
47464 \begin_inset Flex URL
47467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47469 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47477 \begin_layout Bibliography
47478 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47479 LatexCommand bibitem
47485 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47488 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47492 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47494 \begin_inset Newline newline
47498 \begin_inset Flex URL
47501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47503 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47511 \begin_layout Bibliography
47512 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47513 LatexCommand bibitem
47519 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47522 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47526 about new features in
47532 \begin_inset Newline newline
47536 \begin_inset Flex URL
47539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47541 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47549 \begin_layout Standard
47550 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47584 \begin_inset Note Note
47587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47594 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47595 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47596 bibliography is the second one:
47604 \begin_layout Standard
47605 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47606 LatexCommand bibtex
47607 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47608 options "biblio/alphadin"
47615 \begin_layout Standard
47616 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47620 \begin_layout Standard
47621 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47622 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47628 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47629 LatexCommand printindex